HP XP 12000, XP 10000, SVS 200 LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP User guide
Below you will find brief information for LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP XP 12000, LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP XP 10000, LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP SVS200. This guide will help you configure and manage Logical Unit Numbers (LUNs) and secure access to them on the HP StorageWorks XP12000, XP10000, and SVS200 disk arrays. You can also use it to configure Fibre Channel ports and Fibre Channel switches for authentication.
Advertisement
Advertisement
HP StorageWorks
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide for the XP12000/XP10000/SVS200
Part number: T1714-96013
Seventh edition: March 2007
Legal and notice information
© Copyright 1999, 2007 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
Confidential computer software. Valid license from HP required for possession, use or copying. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and
12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S. Government under vendor’s standard commercial license.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, and Windows NT are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
Contents
About this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Intended audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Document conventions and symbols
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subscription service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Overview of LUN Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Configuring LU paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring LU paths in Fibre Channel environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring LU paths in iSCSI environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring LU paths in NAS environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring LUN security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring LUs for use by RAID Manager XP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel port addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data transfer speed for Fibre Channel ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard, High Speed, and Initiator/External MIX modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI port and iSNS server settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status of connections between hosts and the array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User authentication (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User authentication operations and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication of Fibre Channel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication of ports (performing mutual authentication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User authentication (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User authentication operations and settings (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication of iSCSI targets (performing mutual authentication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAS channel adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Preparing to use LUN Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring WWW client computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling required software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes on using LUN Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 LUN Manager panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
LUN Manager pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LU Path tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAS folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LU Path table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower-left list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
3
WWN name table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI name table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDEV table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Package tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAS folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI Function box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Port Mode box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHN list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Information list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FC Switch Information list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication information (Target) list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication Information (Host) list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 LUN Manager operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
79
Starting LUN Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining LU paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating host groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating host groups (when configuring Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating iSCSI targets (when configuring iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering hosts in host groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering hosts in host groups (when configuring Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . .
Registering hosts in iSCSI targets (when configuring iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . .
Associating host groups or iSCSI targets to logical volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing or viewing LU path settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting LU paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a host group’s name and host mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing an iSCSI target’s name and host mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting host groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting iSCSI targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing host group 0 (zero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing iSCSI target 0 (zero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a host bus adapter’s WWN and nickname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a host bus adapter’s iSCSI name and nickname . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting host bus adapters from host groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting host bus adapters from iSCSI targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting unneeded WWNs from the WWN name table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting (initializing) unneeded iSCSI names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing a list of concatenated parity groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining and viewing alternate paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying paths from one Fibre Channel or iSCSI port to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying paths from one NAS port to another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying paths from a Fibre Channel or iSCSI port to a NAS port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying paths from a NAS port to a Fibre Channel or iSCSI port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing a list of alternate paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Using LUN security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling LUN security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling LUN security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring arrays for using RAID Manager XP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying logical devices as command devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting logical devices from RAID Manager XP commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining remote command devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring Fibre Channel ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Fibre Channel topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressing Fibre Channel ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a Fibre Channel port’s data transfer speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching between Standard, High Speed, and Initiator/External MIX mode . . . . . . . . . .
Making settings on iSCSI ports and iSNS servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making settings on iSCSI ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making settings on iSNS servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting user authentication (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling and disabling authentication of hosts in host groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering a host’s user information on a host group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a host’s user information (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a host’s user information (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a host group’s user information (when performing mutual authentication) . . . . . . .
Clearing a host group’s user information (when performing mutual authentication) . . . . . . . .
Settings and connection results in authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . .
Settings and connection results in authentication of Fibre Channel switches . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a Fibre Channel port’s information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering a Fibre Channel port’s user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering a Fibre Channel switch’s user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing a Fibre Channel switch’s user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a Fibre Channel switch’s authentication mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying whether a Fibre Channel switch can perform authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting user authentication (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling and disabling authentication of hosts on iSCSI targets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Registering a host’s user information on an iSCSI target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a host’s user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a host’s user information (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying an iSCSI target’s user information (when performing mutual authentication) . . . . . .
Clearing an iSCSI target’s user information (when performing mutual authentication) . . . . . . .
Settings and connection results in authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . .
Operating NAS channel adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restarting a NAS channel adapter’s OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stopping a NAS channel adapter’s OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting a NAS channel adapter’s OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Troubleshooting LUN Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
133
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacting you HP account support representative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6 Finding an open-system host’s World Wide Name (WWN) . . . . . .
135
Finding WWNs in Windows NT or Windows 2000 environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding WWNs in Sun Solaris environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding WWNs in AIX, SGI Irix, or Sequent environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding WWNs in HP-UX environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size . . . . . . .
139
Overview of Volume Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Manager function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Manager guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
5
Volume Manager operations using a path-defined LDEV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Custom Volume Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CVS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parity group configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume to Space function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating CV capacity for mainframe systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calculating CV capacity for open systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Initialize and Make Volume functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSID requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requirements for CU groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Preparing to use Volume Manager or Custom Volume Size . . . . . . .
155
System requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Volume Manager and CVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting to the array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Volume Manager and CVS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing to Modify mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Volume Manager operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
Volume Manager panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Manager main pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDEV Information tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDEV Information table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity Unit box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selected LDEVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select an LDEV list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Count list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Free LDEVs table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expanded LDEVs list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Manager operations shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set LUSE Confirmation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release LUSE Confirmation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset LUSE Confirmation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concatenation List pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Manager operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to use Volume Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Manager operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing LUSE configuration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing concatenated parity groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating LUSE volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating LUSE volumes using the Volume Count list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating LUSE volumes using the Select an LDEV list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating LUSE volumes using the LDEV information table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Releasing LUSE volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing LUSE capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resetting unregistered LUSE volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Custom Volume Size operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
Custom Volume Size panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customized Volume pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parity Group - LDEV tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity Unit list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parity Group - LDEV table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Progress bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Volume to Space Confirmation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (1) for OPEN-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (1) for other than OPEN-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (1) for OPEN-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume Pane (1) for other than OPEN-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Initialize pane (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Initialize pane (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Initialize pane (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concatenation List pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format All pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write to Control Blocks pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Custom Volume Size operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Before starting CVS operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
CVS operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Viewing current CVS configuration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Viewing concatenated parity groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Converting logical volumes to space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating CVS volumes (Install CV operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Deleting CVS volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Converting CVs back to FVs (Volume Initialize operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Re-creating CVs after initializing the VDEV (Make Volume operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Formatting LDEVs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Making external mainframe volumes usable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 Troubleshooting Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size . . . . . .
213
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
215
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
7
Figures
Array integrating Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and NAS environments . . . . . . . . . . . .
LU path configuration in Fibre Channel environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LU path configuration in iSCSI environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LU path configuration in NAS environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling LUN security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabling LUN security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FC-AL and Point-to-point topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ports in High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication of Fibre Channel switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUN Manager pane (icon under Fibre folder selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUN Manager pane (icon under iSCSI folder selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAS folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WWN name table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI name table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port pane (icon under Fibre folder selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port pane (icon under iSCSI folder selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port pane (icon under NAS folder selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port table (Fibre Channel ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port table (iSCSI ports and iSNS servers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI Function box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Port Mode box (Fibre Channel ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Port Mode box (iSCSI port and iSNS server) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHN list (NAS channel adapters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication pane (Fibre folder selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication pane (port icon under Fibre folder selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authentication pane (icon under iSCSI folder selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New Host Group pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New Host Group pane (Option selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New iSCSI Target pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New iSCSI Target pane (Option selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New WWN dialog box (when reg. a host prev. conn. to the array) . . . . . . . .
Add New WWN dialog box (registering a host that has never been connected to the array) 87
Add New iSCSI name pane (registering a host that was previously connected to the array)
Add New iSCSI name pane (registering a host that has never been connected to the array)
Information about LU paths to be defined (Fibre Channel environment) . . . . . . . . .
8
Information about LU paths to be defined (iSCSI environment) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Information about LU paths to be deleted (Fibre Channel environments) . . . . . . . . .
Information about LU paths to be deleted (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Host Group dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change Host Group dialog box (Option selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change iSCSI Target pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change iSCSI Target pane (Option selected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change WWN & Nickname dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check WWNs dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change iSCSI name & Nickname pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check iSCSI names dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concatenation List pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alternate Paths pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register Ports to iSNS Server pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Ports from iSNS Server pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Result of Registration to iSNS Server pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Result of Deletion from iSNS Server pane
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ping pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ping Status pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New User Information (Host) pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change User Information (Host) pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Authentication Information pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Authentication Information pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Port Information pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Default Setting(User Name/Secret) pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Authentication Information pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clear Authentication Information pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add New User Information (Host) pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change User Information (Host) pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delete Authentication Information pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specify Authentication Information pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LightPulse Utility/NT pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUSE configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Volume Initialize function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview of Make Volume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parity group configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual CVS volume configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Icons showing Unlocked status and View mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mode changing confirmation message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Icons showing Locked status and Modify mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Manager pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Manager operations shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set LUSE Confirmation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release LUSE Confirmation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset LUSE Confirmation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Concatenation List pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customized Volume pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume to Space Confirmation pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
9
Install CV pane (1) for OPEN-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (1) for other than OPEN-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (3) for setting SSIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install CV pane (4) for confirming Install CV settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (1) for OPEN-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (1) for other than OPEN-V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (3) for setting SSIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Volume pane (4) for confirming Make Volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Initialize pane (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Initialize pane (2) for setting SSIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume Initialize pane (3) for confirming Volume Initialize settings . . . . . . . . . . .
Concatenation List pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format All pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write to Control Blocks pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
10
Tables
Document conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available addresses for Fibre Channel ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port serial numbers and names (4-port channel adapters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port serial numbers and names (8-port channel adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port serial numbers and names (16-port channel adapter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port serial numbers and names (XP10000/SVS200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel port icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NAS port icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI port icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUN status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDEV status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel adapter and port block icons (Fibre folder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel adapter package icons (iSCSI folder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fibre Channel port and Fibre Channel host group icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iSCSI port and iSCSI target status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host modes for host groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Host mode options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combinations of port settings and connection results (Fibre Channel environments) . . . .
Combinations of Fibre Channel settings and connection results . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combinations of port settings and connection results (iSCSI environments) . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting LUN Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating CVS volumes using Install CV (for OPEN-V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CVS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV capacity by emulation type (mainframe systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CV capacity by emulation type (open systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management area capacity of mainframe volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Management area capacity of open-system volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boundary value for RAID levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slot capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings for the Make Volume operation (OPEN-V only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SSID requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDEV status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parity group status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VDEV status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LDEV status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Volume attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emulation groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set SSID tree icons (Install CV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set SSID tree icons (Make Volume) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set SSID tree icons (Volume Initialize) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
11
12
About this guide
This guide provides information about:
• LUN Manager (Part 1)
• Volume Manager (Part 2)
Intended audience
This guide is intended for customers and HP-authorized service providers with knowledge of:
• Disk array hardware and software
• Data processing and RAID storage subsystems and their basic functions and utilities
Prerequisites
Prerequisites for installing this product include:
• Installing the HP StorageWorks disk array(s)
• Installing the license key for this product
Related documentation
The following documents provide related information:
•
HP StorageWorks XP glossary
•
HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200
•
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
•
HP StorageWorks LUN Security XP Extension user guide
•
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
•
HP StorageWorks XP Disk/Cache Partition user guide
You can find these documents from the Manuals page of the HP Business Support Center website: http://www.hp.com/support/manuals
In the Storage section, click storage software and then select your product.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
13
Document conventions and symbols
Table 1 Document conventions
Convention
Blue text:
Blue, underlined text: http://www.hp.com
Bold text
Italic text
Monospace text
Monospace, italic text
Monospace, bold text
Element
Cross-reference links and e-mail addresses website addresses
• Keys that are pressed
• Text typed into a GUI element, such as a box
• GUI elements that are clicked or selected, such as menu and list items, buttons, tabs, and check boxes
Text emphasis
• File and directory names
• System output
• Code
• Commands, their arguments, and argument values
• Code variables
• Command variables
Emphasized monospace text
CAUTION:
Indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to equipment or data.
IMPORTANT:
Provides clarifying information or specific instructions.
NOTE:
Provides additional information.
TIP:
Provides helpful hints and shortcuts.
HP technical support
For worldwide technical support information, see the HP support website: http://www.hp.com/support
Before contacting HP, collect the following information:
• Product model names and numbers
• Technical support registration number (if applicable)
• Product serial numbers
• Error messages
• Operating system type and revision level
14
About this guide
• Detailed questions
Subscription service
HP recommends that you register your product at the Subscriber's Choice for Business website: http://www.hp.com/go/e-updates
After registering, you will receive e-mail notification of product enhancements, new driver versions, firmware updates, and other product resources.
HP websites
For additional information, see the following HP websites:
• http://www.hp.com
• http://www.hp.com/go/storage
• http://www.hp.com/service_locator
• http://www.hp.com/support/manuals
• http://www.hp.com/support/downloads
Documentation feedback
HP welcomes your feedback.
To make comments and suggestions about product documentation, please send a message to [email protected]
. All submissions become the property of HP.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
15
16
About this guide
1 Overview of LUN Manager
The XP12000/XP10000/SVS200 arrays integrate the following storage environments to provide advanced storage solutions:
• Fibre Channel: Fibre Channel is a protocol that enables fast data transfers and can be used for configuring a storage area network (SAN). To use an array as SAN storage, you should attach host servers to the array’s Fibre Channel ports.
• iSCSI: internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) is a protocol that enables data transfers between host computers and large-scale storage devices over an Internet Protocol (IP) network and is suitable for data transfers between remote locations. To use an array as IP storage, you should attach host servers to the array’s iSCSI ports.
In an iSCSI environment, the array provides mutual user authentication between hosts and ports using
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP).
NOTE:
• iSCSI environments that you create with LUN Manager support local connections (that is, hosts in the same domain can communicate with each other), but neither support inter-domain connections or external LAN connections.
• When configuring iSCSI environments, you must confirm the operating systems used to run hosts in the IP network. You can configure iSCSI networks only when each host runs on the Windows
Server 2003, Windows 2000®, or HP-UX 11i operating system. However, user authentication is not available on hosts running on HP-UX 11i.
• You can connect switching hubs to iSCSI ports, but cannot connect other network relay devices to iSCSI ports.
• NAS: NAS is a type of storage device attached to a LAN. NAS contains an embedded operating system and file system to enable file sharing by multi-platform host servers. To use an array as a
NAS storage, you should attach host servers to the array’s NAS ports.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
17
Figure 1 Array integrating Fibre Channel, iSCSI, and NAS environments
You can connect the array to open-system server hosts on different platforms (for example, UNIX and
PC servers). To configure a system that includes open-system hosts and an array, you must use LUN
Manager to configure logical volumes and ports.
One of the important tasks with logical volume configuration is to define I/O paths from hosts to logical volumes. If paths are defined, hosts can send commands and data to logical volumes and receive data from logical volumes.
After the system begins operating, you might need to modify the system configuration. For example, if you add hosts or disks, you must add I/O paths. Even when the system is operating, you can use LUN
Manager to modify the system configuration. You do not need to reboot the system when changing the system configuration.
NOTE:
Throughout this user guide, logical volumes are sometimes referred to as logical devices (LDEVs).
Configuring LU paths
Use LUN Manager to make various settings for logical volumes (LUs), including LU path settings. When you configure a system, you must define LU paths to let hosts transfer data to and from storage.
CAUTION:
When defining LU paths, you must not use RAID Manager XP and XP Remote Web Console at the same time.
18
Overview of LUN Manager
Configuring LU paths in Fibre Channel environments
After open-system hosts and the array are physically connected by cables, hubs, and so on, you must use
LUN Manager to establish I/O paths between the hosts and logical volumes. This defines which host can access which logical volume. Logical volumes that open-system hosts can access are referred to as logical
units (LUs). Paths between open-system hosts and LUs are referred to as LU paths.
Before defining LU paths, you must classify server hosts by host groups. For example, if Linux and
Windows hosts are connected to the array, you must create one host group for Linux hosts and another host group for Windows hosts. Then you must register the host bus adapters for Linux hosts in the Linux host group. You must also register the host bus adapters for Windows hosts in the Windows host group.
Host groups can contain only hosts connected to the same port, and cannot contain hosts connected to different ports. For example, if two Windows hosts are connected to port 1A and three Windows hosts are connected to port 1B, you cannot register all five Windows hosts in one host group. You must register the first two Windows hosts in one host group and register the remaining three Windows hosts in another host group.
After classifying server hosts into host groups, you must associate the host groups to logical volumes. In
paths are defined between the two hosts in the hg-lnx host group and the three logical volumes.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
19
Figure 2 LU path configuration in Fibre Channel environments
Use LUN Manager to define paths between a single server host and multiple LUs. In
, both hosts in the hg-lnx host group can access the three LUs.
Use LUN Manager to define paths between multiple server hosts and a single LU. In
, the LU identified by CU-LDEV number 00:00 is accessible from both hosts belonging to the hg-lnx host group.
In
, LUs associated with the hg-lnx host group are addressed by numbers 0000 to 0002. The LU’s address number is referred to as the logical unit number (LUN). When Continuous Access XP and other optional programs manipulate LUs, the programs use LUNs to specify the LUs to be manipulated.
You can add, change, and delete LU paths when the system is operating. For example, if you add new disks or server hosts to the array, you can add new LU paths. If you replace an existing server host, you can delete LU paths corresponding to the host before replacing the host. You do not need to restart the system when you use LUN Manager to add, change, and delete LU paths.
If a hardware failure (such as a CHA failure) occurs, some LU paths might be disabled and some I/O operations might be stopped. To avoid this situation, the system administrator can define alternate LU paths. If one LU path fails, the alternate path takes over the host I/O.
For more information, see:
• Changing or viewing LU path settings
• Defining and viewing alternate paths
20
Overview of LUN Manager
NOTE:
• In Fibre Channel environments, you can define up to 1,024 LU paths for one host group and up to
1,024 LU paths for one port.
• You cannot define LU paths to LUN On-Demand volumes.
• You cannot define LU paths to volumes reserved by Auto LUN XP.
• You can create up to 255 host groups for one Fibre Channel port.
• You cannot define LU paths to journal volumes.
• You cannot define LU paths to pool volumes.
Configuring LU paths in iSCSI environments
After open-system hosts and the array are physically connected by cables, hubs, and so on, you must use
LUN Manager to establish I/O paths between the hosts and logical volumes. This defines which host can access which logical volume. Logical volumes that open-system hosts can access are referred to as logical
units (LUs). Paths between open-system hosts and LUs are referred to as LU paths.
Before defining LU paths, you must classify server hosts by iSCSI targets. For example, if Linux and
Windows hosts are connected to the array, you must create one iSCSI target for Linux hosts and another iSCSI target for Windows hosts. Then you must register the host bus adapters for Linux hosts in the Linux iSCSI target. You must also register the host bus adapters for Windows hosts in the Windows iSCSI target.
iSCSI targets can contain only hosts connected to the same port, and cannot contain hosts connected to different ports. For example, if two Windows hosts are connected to port 1A and three Windows hosts are connected to port 1B, you cannot register all five Windows hosts in one iSCSI target. You must register the first two Windows hosts in one iSCSI target and register the remaining three Windows hosts in another iSCSI target.
After classifying server hosts into iSCSI targets, you must associate the iSCSI targets to logical volumes. In
paths are defined between the two hosts in the hg-lnx iSCSI target and the three logical volumes.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
21
Figure 3 LU path configuration in iSCSI environments
Use LUN Manager to define paths between a single server host and multiple LUs. In
, both hosts in the hg-lnx iSCSI target can access the three LUs.
Use LUN Manager to define paths between multiple server hosts and a single LU. In
, the LU identified by CU-LDEV number 00:00 is accessible from both hosts belonging to the hg-lnx iSCSI target.
In
Figure 3 , LUs associated with the hg-lnx iSCSI target are addressed by numbers 0 to 2. The LU’s
address number is referred to as a logical unit number (LUN). When Continuous Access XP and other optional programs manipulate LUs, the programs use LUNs to specify the LUs to be manipulated.
You can add, change, and delete LU paths when the system is operating. For example, if you add new disks or server hosts to the array, you can add new LU paths. If you replace an existing server host, you can delete LU paths corresponding to the host before replacing the host. You do not need to restart the system when you use LUN Manager to add, change, and delete LU paths.
If a hardware failure (such as a CHA failure) occurs, some LU paths might be disabled and some I/O operations might be stopped. To avoid this situation, the system administrator can define alternate LU paths. If one LU path fails, the alternate path takes over the host I/O.
For more information, see:
• Changing or viewing LU path settings
22
Overview of LUN Manager
• Defining and viewing alternate paths
For more information about LUN configuration, see
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume
.
NOTE:
• In iSCSI environments, you can define up to 1,024 LU paths for one iSCSI target and up to 1,024
LU paths for one port.
• You cannot define LU paths to LUN On-Demand volumes.
• You cannot define LU paths to volumes reserved by Auto LUN XP.
• You can create up to 64 iSCSI targets for one Fibre Channel port.
• You cannot define LU paths to journal volumes.
• You cannot define LU paths to pool volumes.
• In iSCSI environments, you cannot define LU paths to logical volumes that do not have the Read/Write access attribute.
• You cannot define LU paths to volumes on which a volume management area (VMA) is set.
Configuring LU paths in NAS environments
In Fibre Channel or iSCSI environments, you must classify hosts into host groups based on the platform. In
NAS environments, however, you do not need to classify hosts. In NAS environments, hosts attached to a
NAS port are automatically registered in a host group named User.
In NAS environments, LUs are classified into system LUs or user LUs. System LUs contain system information necessary for managing the NAS environment and can be manipulated only by HP service representatives. User LUs contain data that can be accessed by network users. When configuring NAS systems, you must define paths between hosts and user LUs.
gives an example of defining paths between hosts and user LUs. In NAS environments, paths are always defined between a user LU and a group of four ports. Because of this multi-path configuration, hosts can access the user LU even if one of the paths fails.
NOTE:
• In NAS environments, you can define up to 256 LU paths for one NAS port.
• In NAS environments, you cannot define LU paths to logical volumes that do not have the Read/Write or Read/Write (S-VOL Disable) access attribute.
• You cannot define LU paths to LUN On-Demand volumes.
• You cannot define LU paths to volumes reserved by Auto LUN XP.
• The LUN Manager pane displays two host groups (that is, User and NAS-Sys) below each NAS port.
When defining LU paths, you can use only User; you cannot use NAS-Sys.
• You cannot define LU paths to volumes on which a volume management area (VMA) is set.
• You cannot define LU path to journal volumes.
• You cannot define LU path to virtual volumes.
• You cannot define LU path to pool volumes.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
23
Figure 4 LU path configuration in NAS environments
Configuring LUN security
To protect mission-critical data in the array from illegal access, you must apply security policies to logical volumes. Use LUN Manager to enable LUN security on ports to safeguard LUs from illegal access.
NOTE:
• You cannot apply LUN security to NAS ports.
• If a port has the External attribute, you cannot apply LUN security to the port.
24
Overview of LUN Manager
If LUN security is enabled, host groups affect which host can access which LUs. Hosts can only access LUs associated with the host group the hosts belong to. Hosts cannot access LUs associated with other host groups. For example, hosts in the hp-ux host group cannot access LUs associated with the Windows host group. Also, hosts in the Windows host group cannot access LUs associated with the hp-ux host group.
In
, LUN security is enabled on port CL1-A. The two hosts in the hp-lnx host group can only access
LUs 00:00, 00:01, and 00:02. The two hosts in the hg-hpux host group can only access LUs 02:01 and
02:02. The two hosts in the hg-solar host group can only access LUs 01:05 and 01:06.
Figure 5 Enabling LUN security
Usually, you do not need to disable LUN security on ports. If LUN security is disabled on a port, connected hosts can only access LUs associated with host group 0, and cannot access LUs associated with any other host groups.
Figure 6 Disabling LUN security
Host group 0 is the only host group reserved for each port by default. If you use the LUN Manager pane to view a list of host groups in a port, host group 0 usually appears at the top of the list and is indicated by 00 (see
NOTE:
By default, the name of host group 0 group 0 for port 1A is named consists of the port name, a hyphen, and 00. For example, host
1A-G00 by default. You can change the name of host group 0.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
25
By default, LUN security is disabled on each port. When you configure the system, you must enable LUN security on each port to which hosts are connected.
For more information, see
Configuring LUs for use by RAID Manager XP
System administrators can enter RAID Manager XP commands from open-system hosts to perform
Continuous Access XP and Business Copy XP operations on logical devices. For example, administrators can enter RAID Manager XP commands to create or split pairs. To allow administrators to use RAID
Manager XP commands, you must ensure that at least one logical device is used as a command device.
A command device receives RAID Manager XP commands entered from open-system hosts. When the administrator enters a RAID Manager XP command from an open-system host, the RAID Manager XP command is transferred via the command device to the target logical device.
To protect a logical device from RAID Manager XP commands, you must apply command device security to the logical device. If command device security is applied to a logical device, the device is not affected by RAID Manager XP commands even when commands are transferred via a command device to that device.
For more information, see
Configuring arrays for using RAID Manager XP commands .
NOTE:
You cannot use the following volumes as command devices:
• Volumes that do not have the Read/Write access attribute
• Volumes reserved by Auto LUN XP
• Continuous Access XP volumes
• Business Copy XP volumes
• External LUs
• Volumes on which a VMA is set
• Virtual volumes
Fibre Channel ports
When configuring Fibre Channel environments, you must configure the Fibre Channel topology and set addresses to the Fibre Channel ports.
You can optimize system performance by adjusting settings for the Fibre Channel ports. You can improve system performance by adjusting the data transfer speed at Fibre Channel ports and changing the channel adapter mode.
Fibre Channel topologies
The term topology indicates how devices are connected to each other. Fibre Channel provides the following topologies:
• Fabric: Uses a fabric switch to connect a large number of devices (up to 16 million) together.
Each device has the full bandwidth of 100 MB/sec.
• FC-AL (Fibre Channel-Arbitrated Loop): A shared interface that can connect up to 126 devices
(AL-ports) together. The 100 MB/sec bandwidth is shared among devices connected to each other.
• Point-to-point: The simplest fibre topology directly connects two devices together.
26
Overview of LUN Manager
Figure 7 FC-AL and Point-to-point topologies
When configuring the system, use the LUN Manager pane to specify whether the hosts and array are connected by a fabric switch.
If you use a fabric switch, you must specify FC-AL or point-to-point in the LUN Manager pane (by default,
FC-AL is specified). If you use a fabric switch, see the fabric switch’s documentation to learn whether you should use FC-AL or point-to-point. Some fabric switches require that you specify point-to-point to get the system running.
If you are not using a fabric switch, you must specify FC-AL. For more information, see
.
Fibre Channel port addresses
When configuring the system, you must set addresses for Fibre Channel ports. When addressing Fibre
Channel ports, you can use the AL-PA (arbitrated-loop physical address) or loop ID as the address
(see
).
For more information, see
Addressing Fibre Channel ports .
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
27
22
23
24
25
19
20
21
15
16
17
18
12
13
14
26
27
28
29
30
31
6
7
8
9
10
11
0
1
2
3
4
5
Table 2 Available addresses for Fibre Channel ports
Loop ID Loop ID Loop ID
BA
B9
B6
B5
B4
B3
C6
C5
C3
BC
CC
CB
CA
C9
C7
D2
D1
CE
CD
D6
D5
D4
D3
E0
DC
DA
D9
E8
E4
E2
E1
Port address
(AL-PA)
EF
84
85
86
87
79
80
81
82
83
76
77
78
73
74
75
92
93
94
95
88
89
90
91
67
68
69
70
71
72
64
65
66
58
59
60
61
62
63
54
55
56
57
51
52
53
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
39
40
41
42
35
36
37
38
32
33
34
7A
79
76
75
74
73
82
81
80
7C
97
90
8F
88
84
9E
9D
9B
98
A6
A5
A3
9F
AB
AA
A9
A7
AE
AD
AC
Port address
(AL-PA)
B2
B1
49
47
46
45
43
3C
4D
4C
4B
4A
54
53
52
51
4E
5A
59
56
55
66
65
63
5C
6B
6A
69
67
6E
6D
6C
Port address
(AL-PA)
72
71
18
17
10
0F
23
1F
1E
1D
1B
08
04
02
01
29
27
26
25
2D
2C
2B
2A
33
32
31
2E
39
36
35
34
Port address
(AL-PA)
3A
Loop ID
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
111
112
113
114
115
116
107
108
109
110
103
104
105
106
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
Data transfer speed for Fibre Channel ports
As the system continues operating, you might notice that a larger amount of data is transferred at some ports, but a smaller amount is transferred at other ports. If you set a faster data transfer speed for
28
Overview of LUN Manager
ports where a larger amount of data is transferred, you can optimize system performance. If you set a slower data transfer speed for ports where a smaller amount of data is transferred, you can also optimize performance.
For more information, see
Specifying a Fibre Channel port's data transfer speed .
Standard, High Speed, and Initiator/External MIX modes
Channel adapter boards have built-in ports used for connecting hosts and an array. Ports can be in
Standard, High Speed, or Initiator/External MIX mode, although all ports are in Standard mode by default. If a port satisfies certain conditions, you can apply High Speed mode to improve port performance. If a port satisfies certain conditions, you can apply Initiator/External MIX mode so that one part can be used both as an initiator port for Continuous Access XP or Continuous Access XP Journal and as an external port applied to a remote command device. For instructions on defining a remote command device, see the HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide.
You must apply High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode to groups of four ports, not to individual ports. In LUN Manager terminology, each group of four ports is referred to as a port block. You can apply High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode to each port block.
When you apply High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode, two of the four ports in a port block must satisfy the following conditions. Also, the other two ports must satisfy the following conditions:
• The two ports have the same Fabric option (Enable or Disable).
• The two ports have FC-AL as the Connection option.
• The two ports use different port addresses and no matching addresses.
• When you apply High Speed mode, the two ports have the same port attribute (Initiator, RCU target, or Target).
• When you apply Initiator/External MIX mode, one of the two ports takes the initiator attribute and the other port takes the external attribute.
• Only one of the ports is used for connecting the host.
shows an example of High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode applied to one or two port blocks when the channel adapter board has eight ports. If the channel adapter board has 16 ports, you can apply High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode in the same way, even though there are four port blocks.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
29
Figure 8 Ports in High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode
If High Speed mode is applied to the four ports in a port block, only two of the ports can be used for connecting the host. These two ports can exclusively use channel processors and fibre optic processors
(FOPs) that would otherwise be reserved for the other two ports. Therefore, system performance improves.
By balancing workloads on processors, you can expect a greater improvement in system performance.
You cannot change Standard mode to High Speed mode or vice versa while you are online to the hosts.
You must reboot the hosts after changing the mode.
To change the configuration of a port being used, you must perform a backup operation before changing the port configuration.
Port names can differ, depending on whether ports are in Standard, High Speed, or Initiator/External
MIX mode. For more information about port names, see
,
,
, and
For more information, see
Switching between Standard, High Speed, and Initiator/External MIX mode .
30
Overview of LUN Manager
NOTE:
• Sometimes Standard, High Speed, and Initiator/External MIX modes are collectively referred to as
Fibre PCB modes
.
PCB is an acronym for printed circuit board
. The array documentation sometimes uses the term PCB when referring to a channel adapter, which is a printed circuit board used for connecting hosts and an array.
• Storage partition administrators cannot apply High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode.
21
22
23
24
25
18
19
20
26
27
28
10
11
12
8
9
6
7
13
14
15
16
17
4
5
2
3
0
1
Table 3 Port serial numbers and names (4-port channel adapters)
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
CL1-A
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
CL2-A
–
–
–
–
CL1-E
CL3-E
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-C
CL3-C
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-A
CL3-A
–
–
–
–
CL1-G
CL3-G
–
–
–
–
–
CL3-A [1-A 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-C
CL3-C [1-C 2nd]
–
CL1-E
–
–
–
–
CL3-E [1-E 2nd]
–
–
CL1-G
–
–
CL3-G [1-G 2nd]
–
139
140
141
142
134
135
136
137
138
128
129
130
131
132
133
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
–
–
–
–
CL2-E
CL4-E
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-C
CL4-C
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-A
CL4-A
–
–
CL2-G
–
–
CL4-G
–
–
–
–
–
CL4-A [2-A 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-C
CL4-C [2-C 2nd]
–
CL2-E
–
–
–
–
CL4-E [2-E 2nd]
–
–
CL2-G
–
–
CL4-G [2-G 2nd]
–
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
31
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
–
–
–
–
CL1-N
CL3-N [1-N 2nd]
–
–
CL1-Q
–
–
–
–
CL3-Q [1-Q 2nd]
–
–
CL9-A
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-J
CL3-J [1-J 2nd]
–
CL1-L
–
–
–
–
CL3-L [1-L 2nd]
–
–
60
61
62
63
64
57
58
59
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
47
48
49
43
44
45
46
37
38
39
40
34
35
36
41
42
29
30
31
32
33
–
–
–
–
CL1-N
CL3-N
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-Q
CL3-Q
–
–
CL9-A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-J
CL3-J
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-L
CL3-L
–
–
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
-
-
-
-
CL2-N
-
-
CL4-N [2-N 2nd]
CL2-Q
–
–
–
–
CL4-Q [2-Q 2nd]
–
–
CLA-A
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-J
CL4-J [2-J 2nd]
–
CL2-L
–
–
–
–
CL4-L [2-L 2nd]
–
–
167
168
169
170
171
172
162
163
164
165
166
173
174
175
176
177
157
158
159
160
161
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
178
179
180
181
182
–
–
–
–
CL2-N
CL4-N
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-Q
CL4-Q
–
–
CLA-A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-J
CL4-J
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-L
CL4-L
–
–
32
Overview of LUN Manager
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
–
CLB-A [9-A 2nd]
–
–
CL9-C
–
–
–
–
–
CLB-C [9-C 2nd]
–
–
–
–
CL9-E
–
–
CLB-E [9-E 2nd]
–
CL9-G
–
–
–
CLB-G [9-G 2nd]
–
–
–
CL9-J
–
–
CLB-J [9-J 2nd]
–
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
90
91
92
93
85
86
87
88
89
82
83
84
68
69
70
71
72
65
66
67
76
77
78
79
73
74
75
80
81
–
–
CL9-J
CLB-J
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-G
CLB-G
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-E
CLB-E
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-C
CLB-C
–
–
–
–
–
CLB-A
–
–
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
–
CLC-A [A-A 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-C
CLC-C [A-C 2nd]
–
–
–
–
CLA-E
–
–
CLC-E [A-E 2nd]
–
CLA-G
–
–
–
CLC-G [A-G 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-J
CLC-J [A-J 2nd]
–
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
222
223
224
225
226
218
219
220
221
227
228
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
–
–
CLA-J
CLC-J
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-G
CLC-G
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-E
CLC-E
–
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-C
CLC-C
–
–
–
–
–
CLC-A
–
–
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
33
Port serial number
Standard mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-L
CLB-L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-N
CLB-N
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-Q
CLB-Q
–
–
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-L
CLB-L [9-L 2nd]
–
–
CL9-N
–
–
–
–
CLB-N [9-N 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-Q
CLB-Q [9-Q 2nd]
–
–
Port serial number
Standard mode
–
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-L
CLC-L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-N
CLC-N
–
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-Q
CLC-Q
–
–
1
1
The hyphen (-) indicates that the port in not available.
Table 4 Port serial numbers and names (8-port channel adapter)
2
3
4
0
1
114
115
116
117
118
111
112
113
106
107
108
109
110
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
101
102
103
104
105
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
CL1-A
CL3-A
CL5-A
CL7-A
–
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
CL1-A
CL3-A [1-A 2nd]
CL5-A
CL7-A [5-A 2nd]
–
128
129
130
131
132
241
242
243
244
245
246
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
229
230
231
232
233
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
CL2-A
CL4-A
CL6-A
CL8-A
–
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
CL2-A
CL4-A [2-A 2nd]
CL6-A
CL8-A [6-A 2nd]
–
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-L
CLC-L [A-L 2nd]
–
–
CLA-N
–
–
–
–
CLC-N [A-N 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-Q
CLC-Q [A-Q 2nd]
–
–
34
Overview of LUN Manager
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
CL1-G
CL3-G [1-G 2nd]
CL5-G
–
–
–
CL7-G [5-G 2nd]
–
CL1-J
CL3-J [1-J 2nd]
CL5-J
–
–
–
CL7-J [5-J 2nd]
–
CL1-L
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-C
CL3-C [1-C 2nd]
CL5-C
CL7-C [5-C 2nd]
–
CL1-E
–
–
CL3-E [1-E 2nd]
CL5-E
CL7-E [5-E 2nd]
–
–
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
22
23
24
25
19
20
21
26
27
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
17
18
5
6
7
8
9
–
–
–
CL1-J
CL3-J
CL5-J
CL7-J
–
–
–
–
CL1-G
CL3-G
CL5-G
CL7-G
–
CL1-L
–
–
–
CL1-C
CL3-C
–
–
–
CL5-C
CL7-C
–
CL1-E
CL3-E
CL5-E
–
–
CL7-E
–
–
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
CL2-G
CL4-G [2-G 2nd]
CL6-G
–
–
–
CL8-G [6-G 2nd]
–
CL2-J
CL4-J [2-J 2nd]
CL6-J
–
–
–
CL8-J [6-J 2nd]
–
CL2-L
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-C
CL4-C [2-C 2nd]
CL6-C
CL8-C [6-C 2nd]
–
CL2-E
–
–
CL4-E [2-E 2nd]
CL6-E
CL8-E [6-E 2nd]
–
–
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
133
134
135
136
137
158
159
160
161
154
155
156
157
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
–
–
–
CL2-J
CL4-J
CL6-J
CL8-J
–
–
–
–
CL2-G
CL4-G
CL6-G
CL8-G
–
CL2-L
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-C
CL4-C
CL6-C
CL8-C
–
CL2-E
CL4-E
CL6-E
–
–
CL8-E
–
–
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
35
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
CL3-L [1-L 2nd]
CL5-L
CL7-L [5-L 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
CL1-N
CL3-N [1-N 2nd]
CL5-N
CL7-N [5-N 2nd]
–
–
–
–
CL1-Q
CL3-Q [1-Q 2nd]
CL5-Q
CL7-Q [5-Q 2nd]
–
–
–
–
CL9-A
CLB-A [9-A 2nd]
CLD-A
CLF-A [D-A 2nd]
–
CL9-C
CLB-C [9-C 2nd]
CLD-C
CLF-Q [D-C 2nd]
–
61
62
63
64
65
58
59
60
53
54
55
56
57
50
51
52
69
70
71
72
73
66
67
68
74
75
76
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
CL1-Q
CL3-Q
–
–
–
CL5-Q
CL7-Q
–
CL1-N
CL3-N
–
–
–
CL5-N
CL7-N
–
–
–
–
CL9-A
CLB-A
CLD-A
CLF-A
–
CL9-C
CLB-C
CLD-C
CLF-C
–
CL3-L
–
–
CL5-L
CL7-L
–
–
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
CL4-L [2-L 2nd]
CL6-L
CL8-L [6-L 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
CL2-N
CL4-N [2-N 2nd]
CL6-N
CL8-N [6-N 2nd]
–
–
–
–
CL2-Q
CL4-Q [2-Q 2nd]
CL6-Q
CL8-Q [6-Q 2nd]
–
–
–
–
CLA-A
CLC-A [A-A 2nd]
CLE-A
CLG-A [E-A 2nd]
–
CLA-C
CLC-C [A-C 2nd]
CLE-C
CLG-C [E-C 2nd]
–
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
–
–
–
CLA-A
CLC-A
CLE-A
CLG-A
–
–
–
–
CL2-Q
CL4-Q
CL6-Q
CL8-Q
–
CLA-C
CLC-C
CLE-C
CLG-C
–
CL2-N
CL4-N
–
–
–
CL6-N
CL8-N
–
CL4-L
–
–
CL6-L
CL8-L
–
–
36
Overview of LUN Manager
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
CL9-J
–
–
–
CLB-J [9-J 2nd]
CLD-J
CLF-J [D-J 2nd]
–
CL9-L
CLB-L [9-L 2nd]
CLD-L
–
–
CLF-L [D-L 2nd]
–
–
CL9-N
–
–
–
CL9-E
CLB-E [9-E 2nd]
CLD-E
CLF-E [D-E 2nd]
–
–
–
–
CL9-G
CLB-G [9-G 2nd]
CLD-G
CLF-G [D-G 2nd]
–
93
94
95
96
97
90
91
92
85
86
87
88
89
82
83
84
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
77
78
79
80
81
–
–
–
CL9-J
CLB-J
CLD-J
CLF-J
–
–
–
–
CL9-G
CLB-G
CLD-G
CLF-G
–
CL9-L
CLB-L
–
–
CLD-L
CLF-L
–
–
CL9-N
–
–
–
CL9-E
CLB-E
–
–
–
CLD-E
CLF-E
–
Port serial number
Standard mode
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
–
CLA-J
–
–
–
CLC-J [A-J 2nd]
CLE-J
CLG-J [E-J 2nd]
–
CLA-L
CLC-L [A-L 2nd]
CLE-L
–
–
CLG-L [E-L 2nd]
–
–
CLA-N
–
–
–
CLA-E
CLC-E [A-E 2nd]
CLE-E
CLG-E [E-E 2nd]
–
–
–
–
CLA-G
CLC-G [A-G 2nd]
CLE-G
CLG-G [E-G 2nd]
–
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
205
206
207
208
209
236
237
238
239
240
–
–
–
CLA-J
CLC-J
CLE-J
CLG-J
–
–
–
–
CLA-G
CLC-G
CLE-G
CLG-G
–
CLA-L
CLC-L
–
–
CLE-L
CLG-L
–
–
CLA-N
–
–
–
CLA-E
CLC-E
–
–
–
CLE-E
CLG-E
–
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
37
Port serial number
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
Standard mode
CL9-Q
CLB-Q
–
–
–
CLD-Q
CLF-Q
–
CLB-N
CLD-N
–
–
CLF-N
–
–
1
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
CLB-N [9-N 2nd]
CLD-N
CLF-N [D-N 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
CL9-Q
CLB-Q [9-Q 2nd]
CLD-Q
CLF-Q [D-Q 2nd]
–
Port serial number
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
Standard mode
CLA-Q
CLC-Q
–
–
–
CLE-Q
CLG-Q
–
CLC-N
CLE-N
–
–
CLG-N
–
–
1
1
A hyphen (-) indicates that the port is not available.
8
9
10
11
Table 5 Port serial numbers and names (16-port channel adapter)
Port serial number
Standard mode
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
Port serial number
Standard mode
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
0
1
CL1-A
CL3-A
CL1-A
CL3-A [1-A 2nd]
128
129
CL2-A
CL4-A
CL2-A
CL4-A [2-A 2nd]
2
3
6
7
4
5
CL5-A
CL7-A
CL1-B
CL3-B
CL5-B
CL7-B
CL5-A
CL7-A [5-A 2nd]
CL1-B
CL3-B [1-B 2nd]
CL5-B
CL7-B [5-B 2nd]
130
131
132
133
134
135
CL6-A
CL8-A
CL2-B
CL4-B
CL6-B
CL8-B
CL6-A
CL8-A [6-A 2nd]
CL2-B
CL4-B [2-B 2nd]
CL6-B
CL8-B [6-B 2nd]
12
13
14
15
16
CL1-C
CL3-C
CL5-C
CL7-C
CL1-D
CL3-D
CL5-D
CL7-D
CL1-E
CL1-C
CL3-C [1-C 2nd]
CL5-C
CL7-C [5-C 2nd]
CL1-D
CL3-D [1-D 2nd]
CL5-D
CL7-D [5-D 2nd]
CL1-E
140
141
142
143
144
136
137
138
139
CL2-C
CL4-C
CL6-C
CL8-C
CL2-D
CL4-D
CL6-D
CL8-D
CL2-E
CL2-C
CL4-C [2-C 2nd]
CL6-C
CL8-C [6-C 2nd]
CL2-D
CL4-D [2-D 2nd]
CL6-D
CL8-D [6-D 2nd]
CL2-E
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
1
–
–
CLC-N [A-N 2nd]
CLE-N
CLG-N [E-N 2nd]
–
–
–
–
–
CLA-Q
CLC-Q [A-Q 2nd]
CLE-Q
CLG-Q [E-Q 2nd]
–
38
Overview of LUN Manager
Port serial number
Standard mode
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CL3-E [1-E 2nd]
CL5-E
CL7-E [5-E 2nd]
CL1-F
CL3-F [1-F 2nd]
CL5-F
CL7-F [5-F 2nd]
CL1-G
CL3-G [1-G 2nd]
CL5-G
CL7-G [5-G 2nd]
CL1-H
CL3-H [1-H 2nd]
CL5-H
CL7-H [5-H 2nd]
CL1-J
CL3-J [1-J 2nd]
CL5-J
CL7-J [5-J 2nd]
CL1-K
CL3-K [1-K 2nd]
CL5-K
CL7-K [5-K 2nd]
CL1-L
CL3-L [1-L 2nd]
CL5-L
CL7-L [5-L 2nd]
CL1-M
CL3-M [1-M 2nd]
CL5-M
CL7-M [5-M 2nd]
CL1-N
CL3-N [1-N 2nd]
CL5-N
CL7-N [5-N 2nd]
CL1-P
CL3-E
CL5-E
CL7-E
CL1-L
CL3-L
CL5-L
CL7-L
CL1-M
CL3-M
CL5-M
CL7-M
CL1-N
CL3-N
CL5-N
CL7-N
CL1-P
CL5-J
CL7-J
CL1-K
CL3-K
CL5-K
CL7-K
CL1-H
CL3-H
CL5-H
CL7-H
CL1-J
CL3-J
CL1-F
CL3-F
CL5-F
CL7-F
CL1-G
CL3-G
CL5-G
CL7-G
44
45
46
47
40
41
42
43
48
49
50
51
34
35
36
37
38
39
28
29
30
31
32
33
24
25
26
27
20
21
22
23
52
17
18
19
Port serial number
Standard mode
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CL4-E [2-E 2nd]
CL6-E
CL8-E [6-E 2nd]
CL2-F
CL4-F [2-F 2nd]
CL6-F
CL8-F [6-F 2nd]
CL2-G
CL4-G [2-G 2nd]
CL6-G
CL8-G [6-G 2nd]
CL2-H
CL4-H [2-H 2nd]
CL6-H
CL8-H [6-H 2nd]
CL2-J
CL4-J [2-J 2nd]
CL6-J
CL8-J [6-J 2nd]
CL2-K
CL4-K [2-K 2nd]
CL6-K
CL8-K [6-K 2nd]
CL2-L
CL4-L [2-L 2nd]
CL6-L
CL8-L [6-L 2nd]
CL2-M
CL4-M [2-M 2nd]
CL6-M
CL8-M [6-M 2nd]
CL2-N
CL4-N [2-N 2nd]
CL6-N
CL8-N [6-N 2nd]
CL2-P
CL4-E
CL6-E
CL8-E
CL2-L
CL4-L
CL6-L
CL8-L
CL2-M
CL4-M
CL6-M
CL8-M
CL2-N
CL4-N
CL6-N
CL8-N
CL2-P
CL6-J
CL8-J
CL2-K
CL4-K
CL6-K
CL8-K
CL2-H
CL4-H
CL6-H
CL8-H
CL2-J
CL4-J
CL2-F
CL4-F
CL6-F
CL8-F
CL2-G
CL4-G
CL6-G
CL8-G
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
156
157
158
159
160
161
150
151
152
153
154
155
145
146
147
148
149
168
169
170
171
162
163
164
165
166
167
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
39
Port serial number
Standard mode
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CL3-P [1-P 2nd]
CL5-P
CL7-P [5-P 2nd]
CL1-Q
CL3-Q [1-Q 2nd]
CL5-Q
CL7-Q [5-Q 2nd]
CL1-R
CL3-R [1-R 2nd]
CL5-R
CL7-R [5-R 2nd]
CL9-A
CLB-A [9-A 2nd]
CLD-A
CLF-A [D-A 2nd]
CL9-B
CLB-B [9-B 2nd]
CLD-B
CLF-B [D-B 2nd]
CL9-C
CLB-C [9-C 2nd]
CLD-C
CLF-C [D-C 2nd]
CL9-D
CLB-D [9-D 2nd]
CLD-D
CLF-D [D-D 2nd]
CL9-E
CLB-E [9-E 2nd]
CLD-E
CLF-E [D-E 2nd]
CL9-F
CLB-F [9-F 2nd]
CLD-F
CLF-F [D-F 2nd]
CL9-G
56
57
58
59
60
61
53
54
55
66
67
68
69
62
63
64
65
70
71
72
73
74
75
82
83
84
85
86
87
76
77
78
79
80
81
88
CL3-P
CL5-P
CL7-P
CL1-Q
CL3-Q
CL5-Q
CL7-Q
CL1-R
CL3-R
CL5-R
CL7-R
CL9-A
CLB-A
CLD-A
CLF-A
CL9-B
CLB-B
CLD-B
CLF-B
CL9-C
CLB-C
CLD-C
CLF-C
CLD-E
CLF-E
CL9-F
CLB-F
CLD-F
CLF-F
CL9-D
CLB-D
CLD-D
CLF-D
CL9-E
CLB-E
CL9-G
Port serial number
Standard mode
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CL4-P [2-P 2nd]
CL6-P
CL8-P [6-P 2nd]
CL2-Q
CL4-Q [2-Q 2nd]
CL6-Q
CL8-Q [6-Q 2nd]
CL2-R
CL4-R [2-R 2nd]
CL6-R
CL8-R [6-R 2nd]
CLA-A
CLC-A [A-A 2nd]
CLE-A
CLG-A [E-A 2nd]
CLA-B
CLC-B [A-B 2nd]
CLE-B
CLG-B [E-B 2nd]
CLA-C
CLC-C [A-C 2nd]
CLE-C
CLG-C [E-C 2nd]
CLA-D
CLC-D [A-D 2nd]
CLE-D
CLG-D [E-D 2nd]
CLA-E
CLC-E [A-E 2nd]
CLE-E
CLG-E [E-E 2nd]
CLA-F
CLC-F [A-F 2nd]
CLE-F
CLG-F [E-F 2nd]
CLA-G
CL4-P
CL6-P
CL8-P
CLE-B
CLG-B
CLA-C
CLC-C
CLE-C
CLG-C
CLA-A
CLC-A
CLE-A
CLG-A
CLA-B
CLC-B
CL2-Q
CL4-Q
CL6-Q
CL8-Q
CL2-R
CL4-R
CL6-R
CL8-R
CLE-E
CLG-E
CLA-F
CLC-F
CLE-F
CLG-F
CLA-D
CLC-D
CLE-D
CLG-D
CLA-E
CLC-E
CLA-G
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
194
195
196
197
190
191
192
193
198
199
200
201
202
203
210
211
212
213
214
215
204
205
206
207
208
209
216
40
Overview of LUN Manager
Port serial number
Standard mode
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CLB-G [9-G 2nd]
CLD-G
CLF-G [D-G 2nd]
CL9-H
CLB-H [9-H 2nd]
CLD-H
CLF-H [D-H 2nd]
CL9-J
CLB-J [9-J 2nd]
CLD-J
CLF-J [D-J 2nd]
CL9-K
CLB-K [9-K 2nd]
CLD-K
CLF-K [D-K 2nd]
CL9-L
CLB-L [9-L 2nd]
CLD-L
CLF-L [D-L 2nd]
CL9-M
CLB-M [9-M 2nd]
CLD-M
CLF-M [D-M 2nd]
CL9-N
CLB-N [9-N 2nd]
CLD-N
CLF-N [D-N 2nd]
CL9-P
CLB-P [9-P 2nd]
CLD-P
CLF-P [D-P 2nd]
CL9-Q
CLB-Q [9-Q 2nd]
CLD-Q
CLF-Q [D-Q 2nd]
CL9-R
CLB-G
CLD-G
CLF-G
CL9-K
CLB-K
CLD-K
CLF-K
CL9-L
CLB-L
CLD-L
CLF-L
CL9-M
CLB-M
CL9-H
CLB-H
CLD-H
CLF-H
CL9-J
CLB-J
CLD-J
CLF-J
CLD-M
CLF-M
CL9-N
CLB-N
CLD-N
CLF-N
CL9-P
CLB-P
CLD-P
CLF-P
CL9-Q
CLB-Q
CLD-Q
CLF-Q
CL9-R
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
89
90
91
106
107
108
109
110
111
100
101
102
103
104
105
96
97
98
99
92
93
94
95
Port serial number
Standard mode
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CLC-G [A-G 2nd]
CLE-G
CLG-G [E-G 2nd]
CLA-H
CLC-H [A-H 2nd]
CLE-H
CLG-H [E-H 2nd]
CLA-J
CLC-J [A-J 2nd]
CLE-J
CLG-J [E-J 2nd]
CLA-K
CLC-K [A-K 2nd]
CLE-K
CLG-K [E-K 2nd]
CLA-L
CLC-L [A-L 2nd]
CLE-L
CLG-L [E-L 2nd]
CLA-M
CLC-M [A-M 2nd]
CLE-M
CLG-M [E-M 2nd]
CLA-N
CLC-N [A-N 2nd]
CLE-N
CLG-N [E-N 2nd]
CLA-P
CLC-P [A-P 2nd]
CLE-P
CLG-P [E-P 2nd]
CLA-Q
CLC-Q [A-Q 2nd]
CLE-Q
CLG-Q [E-Q 2nd]
CLA-R
CLC-G
CLE-G
CLG-G
CLA-K
CLC-K
CLE-K
CLG-K
CLA-L
CLC-L
CLE-L
CLG-L
CLA-M
CLC-M
CLA-H
CLC-H
CLE-H
CLG-H
CLA-J
CLC-J
CLE-J
CLG-J
CLE-M
CLG-M
CLA-N
CLC-N
CLE-N
CLG-N
CLA-P
CLC-P
CLE-P
CLG-P
CLA-Q
CLC-Q
CLE-Q
CLG-Q
CLA-R
217
218
219
224
225
226
227
220
221
222
223
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
244
245
246
247
248
249
240
241
242
243
250
251
252
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
41
Port serial number
Standard mode
125
126
127
CLB-R
CLD-R
CLF-R
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CLB-R [9-R 2nd]
CLD-R
CLF-R [D-R 2nd]
Port serial number
Standard mode
253
254
255
CLC-R
CLE-R
CLG-R
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CLC-R [A-R 2nd]
CLE-R
CLG-R [E-R 2nd]
42
Overview of LUN Manager
CL1-G
CL3-G
CL5-G
CL7-G
CL1-H
CL3-H
CL5-H
CL7-H
CL1-E
CL3-E
CL5-E
CL7-E
CL1-F
CL3-F
CL5-F
CL7-F
64
65
70
71
72
73
74
75
66
67
68
69
76
77
78
79
80
81
88
89
90
91
92
93
82
83
84
85
86
87
94
95
Table 6 Port serial numbers and names (XP10000/SVS200)
Port serial number
Standard mode
CL1-A
CL3-A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL5-A
CL7-A
CL1-B
CL3-B
CL5-B
CL7-B
–
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CL1-A
–
–
–
–
–
CL3-A[1-A 2nd]
CL5-A
CL7-A[5-A 2nd]
CL1-B
CL3-B[1-B 2nd]
CL5-B
–
–
CL7-B[5-B 2nd]
–
Port serial number
Standard mode
CL1-E
CL3-E[1-E 2nd]
CL5-E
CL7-E[5-E 2nd]
CL1-F
CL3-F[1-F 2nd]
CL5-F
CL7-F[5-F 2nd]
CL1-G
CL3-G[1-G 2nd]
CL5-G
CL7-G[5-G 2nd]
CL1-H
CL3-H[1-H 2nd]
CL5-H
CL7-H[5-H 2nd]
CL2-A
CL4-A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
CL6-A
CL8-A
CL2-B
CL4-B
CL6-B
CL8-B
–
192
193
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
194
195
196
197
216
217
218
219
220
221
210
211
212
213
214
215
222
223
CLA-G
CLC-G
CLE-G
CLG-G
CLA-H
CLC-H
CLE-H
CLG-H
CLA-E
CLC-E
CLE-E
CLG-E
CLA-F
CLC-F
CLE-F
CLG-F
CL2-E
CL4-E[2-E 2nd]
CL6-E
CL8-E[6-E 2nd]
CL2-F
CL4-F[2-F 2nd]
CL6-F
CL8-F[6-F 2nd]
CL2-G
CL4-G[2-G 2nd]
CL6-G
CL8-G[6-G 2nd]
CL2-H
CL4-H[2-H 2nd]
CL6-H
CL8-H[6-H 2nd]
High Speed or
Initiator/External
MIX mode
CL2-A
–
–
–
–
–
CL4-A[2-A 2nd]
CL6-A
CL8-A[6-A 2nd]
CL2-B
CL4-B[2-B 2nd]
CL6-B
–
–
CL8-B[6-B 2nd]
–
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
43
iSCSI port and iSNS server settings
You must make settings on iSCSI ports (and iSNS servers, if necessary) when configuring iSCSI environments. Use LUN Manager to specify the following items when configuring iSCSI environments. For instructions, see
and
Making settings on iSCSI ports and iSNS servers .
• IP address: You must specify the iSCSI port’s IP address when configuring iSCSI environments.
In LUN Manager, the initial value of the iSCSI port’s IP address is 192.168.0.xxx, where xxx is the iSCSI port’s location.
• Subnet mask: You must specify a subnet mask when configuring iSCSI environments. A subnet mask is a value used for obtaining a network address from an IP address. In LUN Manager, the subnet mask’s initial value is 255.255.255.0.
• Gateway address: If a gateway is used, specify the gateway address. A gateway is hardware connecting networks with different protocols.
• iSCSI name: You must assign iSCSI names to iSCSI ports when configuring iSCSI environments.
iSCSI names are used to uniquely identify each iSCSI node. iSCSI nodes are devices that use the iSCSI protocol for communication (for example, iSCSI ports in arrays, host bus adapters in host servers, and switching hubs for network relaying).
iSCSI names must be specified in either of the following formats:
• eui format:
An IEEE 64-bit Extended Unique Identifier used to specify an iSCSI name. The iSCSI name begins with eui. and is followed by the ID found by the vendor in EUI-64 format similar to the
World Wide Name.
Example: eui.02004567A425678D
• iqn format:
The iSCSI Qualified Name format used to specify an iSCSI name. For more information about specifying iSCSI names using this format, see the iSCSI-related documentation.
If a host is connected to an iSCSI port, LUN Manager automatically displays the iSCSI name in iqn format. iSCSI names can include 0 (zero) to 9, and a to f (letters are case-insensitive).
Example: iqn.2006.01.com.hp:iscsi-r500:model-xxx:sn-xxxxxx:lun00
The length of an iSCSI name must be 20 characters in eui format, and up to 223 characters in iqn format. iSCSI names can include letters, numbers, periods (.), hyphens (-), and colons (:); but cannot include double-byte characters. iSCSI names are case-insensitive.
• iSCSI alias: An iSCSI alias is a nickname you assign to an iSCSI name. Assigning iSCSI aliases is optional, but helpful, when managing and identifying iSCSI targets.
It is difficult to identify iSCSI targets by iSCSI names because an iSCSI name consists of numerous characters and is hard to remember. If you assign an iSCSI alias that is brief and easy to remember, you can easily and quickly identify iSCSI targets.
The length of an iSCSI alias must be up to 32 characters. iSCSI aliases can include letters, numbers, periods (.), hyphens (-), and colons (:); but cannot include double-byte characters. iSCSI aliases are case-sensitive; for example, MyPort and myport are different iSCSI aliases.
• Port number: You must assign part numbers to iSCSI ports when configuring iSCSI environments.
Use LUN Manager to specify a decimal port number within the range of 1 to 65535. A port number’s initial value is 3260.
• Keep-alive timer: You must specify the Keep-alive timer when configuring iSCSI environments. The
Keep-alive timer is used when there is a connection between an iSCSI port and another iSCSI node. For example, if the keep-alive timer is set to 60 seconds, the array checks whether packet communications occurred between an iSCSI port and another iSCSI node (such as a host bus adapter or switching hub) every 60 seconds.
Use LUN Manager to specify a value within the range of 0 to 64,800 seconds. The Keep-alive timer’s initial value is 60 seconds.
44
Overview of LUN Manager
• Whether to register iSCSI ports in iSNS servers: The iSNS server is a server computer on which an iSNS service is installed. iSNS is an acronym for Internet Storage Name Service. This server manages IP addresses and iSCSI names of iSCSI ports. Using iSNS servers is optional. If you configure and use iSNS servers, iSCSI ports are easily discovered and managed.
NOTE:
For more information about configuring iSNS servers, see the iSNS-related documentation.
• iSNS server’s IP address: To use an iSNS server, you must specify the iSNS server’s IP address.
• iSNS server’s TCP port number: To use an iSNS server, you must specify the iSNS server’s TCP port number.
NOTE:
Specify 3205 as the TCP port number if you use
Microsoft® iSNS Server as the iSNS server. If you specify other than 3205, you cannot register iSCSI ports in the iSNS server.
Status of connections between hosts and the array
Use LUN Manager to issue a ping command from an array iSCSI port to a host. The ping command checks whether the host and array can communicate with each other. If the host responds to the ping command, the host and array can communicate with each other. For more information, see
Checking the status of the connection between hosts and the array (iSCSI environments only)
.
User authentication (Fibre Channel environments)
When configuring Fibre Channel environments, you can use LUN Manager to set user authentication between the array’s ports and hosts. In Fibre Channel environments, ports and hosts use Null
DH-CHAP (Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol with a Null Diffie-Hellmann algorithm) as the authentication method. This section provides an overview of user authentication.
NOTE:
Throughout this user guide, Null DH-CHAP is sometimes referred to as CHAP.
User authentication operations and settings
User authentication operations in Fibre Channel environments contain the following phases:
1.
A host group of the array authenticates a host attempting to connect (authentication of hosts).
2.
The host authenticates the connection-target host group of the array (authentication of host groups).
CAUTION:
Because host bus adapters currently do not support this function, this authentication phase is not used in Fibre Channel environments.
3.
A target port of the array authenticates a Fibre Channel switch attempting to connect (authentication
of Fibre Channel switches).
The array performs user authentication by host groups. Therefore, host groups and hosts must have their own user information for performing user authentication.
When a host attempts to connect to the array, the authentication of hosts phase starts. In this phase, it is determined whether the host group requires authentication of the host. If the host group does not require authentication of the host, the host connects to the array without authentication. If the host group
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
45
requires authentication of the host, authentication is performed for the host. When the host is successfully authenticated, processing goes to the next phase.
After authentication of the host succeeds, if the host requires user authentication for the host group that is connection target, the authentication of host groups phase starts. In this way, host groups and hosts authenticate with each other, that is, mutual authentication. In the authentication of host groups phase. if the host does not require user authentication for the host group, the host connects to the array without authentication of the host group.
The following explains the settings required for user authentication. The settings for authentication of host groups are needed only when performing mutual authentication.
• Settings for authentication of hosts
• On the array:
Use LUN Manager to specify whether authentication of hosts on each host group is performed.
On a host group that performs authentication, register user information (group name, user name, and secret) of hosts allowed to connect to the host group. A secret is a password used in CHAP authentication. When registering user information, you can also enable or disable authentication on a host basis. For more information, see
Enabling and disabling authentication of hosts in host groups
and
Registering a host's user information on a host group
.
• On hosts:
Configure the operating system and Fibre Channel host bus adapter driver for authentication by host groups with CHAP. You must specify the host’s user name and secret used for CHAP. For more information, see the documentation for the operating system and Fibre Channel host bus adapter driver in your environment.
• Settings for authentication of ports (required if performing mutual authentication)
• On the array:
Use LUN Manager to specify each host group’s user information (user name and secret). For more information, see
Specifying a host group's user information (when performing mutual authentication) .
• On hosts:
Configure the operating system and Fibre Channel host bus adapter driver for authenticating host groups with CHAP. You must specify the user name and secret of the host group that is the connection target. For more information, see the documentation for the operating system and Fibre
Channel host bus adapter driver in your environment.
The next section explains authentication of hosts and host groups.
Authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments)
When a host attempts to connect to the array, the connection results of the authentication of the host differs depending on the host group settings.
illustrates the relationship between host group settings and the connection results.
46
Overview of LUN Manager
Figure 9 Authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments)
Case A to Case D in
is explained as follows:
• Case A through Case C: When performing authentication of host groups
• Case A: If the host’s user information is registered on the host group, and authentication of the host is enabled
The host group authenticates the user information sent from the host. If authentication of the host succeeds, either of the following actions occur:
• When the host is configured for mutual authentication, processing goes to authentication of the host group.
• When the host is not configured for mutual authentication, the host connects to the array.
If the host is not configured for authentication by host groups with CHAP, the authentication fails and the host cannot connect to the array.
• Case B: If the host’s user information is registered on the host group, but authentication of the host is disabled
The host group does not perform authentication of the host. The host connects to the array without authentication regardless of whether or not the host is configured for authentication by host groups with CHAP.
• Case C: If the host’s user information is not registered on the host group
Regardless of the setting on the host, the host group performs authentication of the host, but results in failure. The host cannot connect to the array.
• Case D: When connecting via a host group that does not perform authentication of hosts
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
47
The host connects to the array without authentication of the host regardless of whether or not the host is configured for authentication by host groups with CHAP.
In this case, although you do not need to register the host’s user information on the host group, you can register the user information.
NOTE:
You should register the user information for all hosts to be connected to a host group that performs authentication of hosts. To allow a specific host to connect to such a host group without authentication, configure the host group and the host as follows:
• On the host group:
Register the user information of the host you want to allow to connect without authentication, and then disable the host authentication setting.
shows an example of authentication of hosts. In this figure, WWNs of host bus adapters (HBAs) are abbreviated as a, b, and so on.
Figure 10 Example of authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments)
In
Figure 10 , host group 1 performs authentication of hosts, but host group 2 does not.
Host A’s user information is registered on host group 1, and the authentication setting is enabled.
Therefore, if the authentication of the host succeeds, Host A can connect to the array (or processing goes to the authentication of the host group). As a precondition of successful authentication, configure
Host A for authentication by host groups with CHAP.
48
Overview of LUN Manager
Host B’s user information is also registered on host group 1, but the authentication setting is disabled.
Therefore, Host B can connect to the array without authentication.
Host C’s user information is not registered on host group 1. Therefore, when Host C tries to connect to the array, authentication fails and the connection request is denied regardless of Host C’s setting.
Host D is attached to host group 2, which does not perform authentication of hosts. Therefore, Host D can connect to the array without authentication.
Authentication of Fibre Channel switches
When a host attempts to connect to the array, the connection results of the authentication of the Fibre
Channel switch differs depending on the Fibre Channel switch setting related to each port.
illustrates the relationship between Fibre Channel switch settings and the connection results. The Fibre
Channel switch authentication setting is independent from the host authentication setting.
Figure 11 Authentication of Fibre Channel switches
Case A to Case D in
are explained as follows:
• Case A through Case C: When performing authentication of Fibre Channel switches by ports
• Case A: If the Fibre Channel switch’s user information is registered on the port, and authentication of the Fibre Channel switch is enabled
Each port authenticates the Fibre Channel switch. If the authentication of the Fibre Channel switch succeeds, either of the following actions occur:
• When the Fibre Channel switch is configured for mutual authentication, processing goes to authentication of the port.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
49
• When the Fibre Channel switch is not configured for mutual authentication, the Fibre
Channel switch connects to the array.
If the port’s Fibre Channel switch is not configured for authentication with CHAP, the authentication fails and the Fibre Channel switch cannot connect to the array.
• Case B: If the Fibre Channel switch’s user information is registered on the port, but authentication of the Fibre Channel switch is disabled
Each port does not perform authentication of the Fibre Channel switch. The Fibre Channel switch connects to the array without authentication regardless of whether or not the Fibre Channel switch is configured for authentication with CHAP.
• Case C: If the Fibre Channel switch’s user information is not registered on the port
Regardless of the Fibre Channel switch’s setting, the port performs authentication of the Fibre
Channel switch, but results in failure. The Fibre Channel switch cannot connect to the array.
•
Case D: When not performing authentication of Fibre Channel switches by ports
The Fibre Channel switch connects to the array without authentication of the host regardless of whether or not the Fibre Channel switch is configured for authentication with CHAP.
In this case, although you do not need to register the Fibre Channel switch’s user information on the port, you can register the user information.
Authentication of ports (performing mutual authentication)
When authentication of a host succeeds, the host performs authentication of the port in reverse if the host requires (mutual authentication). In authentication of ports, when the user information (user name and secret) of the port specified on the port side matches the user information stored on the host, the host allows the host group to connect.
User authentication (iSCSI environments)
When configuring iSCSI environments, use LUN Manager to set user authentication between ports on the array and hosts. In iSCSI environments, ports and hosts use Challenge Handshake Authentication
Protocol (CHAP) as the authentication method. This section provides an overview of user authentication.
User authentication operations and settings (iSCSI environments)
User authentication operations in iSCSI environments consist of the following phases:
1.
An iSCSI target of the array authenticates a host attempting to connect (authentication of hosts).
2.
The host authenticates the connection-target iSCSI target of the array (authentication of iSCSI targets).
The array performs user authentication by iSCSI targets. Therefore, iSCSI targets and hosts must have their own user information for performing user authentication.
When a host attempts to connect to the array, the authentication of hosts phase starts. In this phase, it is first determined whether or not the iSCSI target requires authentication of the host. If the iSCSI target does not require authentication of the host, the host connects to the array without authentication. If the iSCSI target requires authentication of the host, authentication is performed for the host. When the host is successfully authenticated, processing goes to the next phase.
After authentication of the host succeeds, if the host requires user authentication for the iSCSI target that is the connection target, the authentication of iSCSI targets phase starts. In this way, iSCSI targets and hosts authenticate with each other, that is, mutual authentication. In the authentication of iSCSI targets phase, if the host does not require user authentication for the iSCSI target, the host connects to the array without authentication of the iSCSI target.
The following explains the settings required for user authentication. The settings for authentication of iSCSI targets are needed only when performing mutual authentication.
50
Overview of LUN Manager
• Settings for authentication of hosts
• On the array:
Use LUN Manager to specify whether authentication of hosts is performed on each iSCSI target.
On an iSCSI target that performs authentication, register user information (iSCSI name, user name, and secret) of hosts allowed to connect to the iSCSI target. A secret is a password used in CHAP authentication. When registering user information, you can also enable or disable authentication on a host basis. For more information about the settings, see
Enabling and disabling authentication of hosts on iSCSI targets
and
Registering a host's user information on an iSCSI target
.
• On hosts:
Configure the operating system and iSCSI driver for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP.
You must specify the host’s user name and secret used for CHAP. For more information, see the documentation for the operating system and iSCSI driver in your environment.
• Settings for authentication of ports (required if performing mutual authentication)
• On the array:
Use LUN Manager to specify each iSCSI target’s user information (user name and secret). For more information about the settings, see
Specifying an iSCSI target's user information (when performing mutual authentication)
.
• On hosts:
Configure the operating system and iSCSI driver for authenticating iSCSI targets with CHAP. You must specify the user name and secret of the iSCSI target that is the connection target. For more information, see the documentation for the operating system and iSCSI driver in your environment.
The next section explains authentication of hosts and iSCSI targets.
Authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments)
When a host attempts to connect to the array, the connection results of the authentication of the host differ depending on the iSCSI target settings.
illustrates the relationship between iSCSI target settings and the connection results.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
51
Figure 12 Authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments)
Case A to Case D in
are explained as follows:
• Case A through Case C: When connecting via an iSCSI target that performs authentication of hosts
• Case A: If the host’s user information is registered on the iSCSI target, and authentication of the host is enabled
The iSCSI target authenticates the user information sent from the host. If authentication of the host succeeds, either of the following actions occur:
• When the host is configured for mutual authentication, processing goes to authentication of the iSCSI target.
• When the host is not configured for mutual authentication, the host connects to the array.
If the host is not configured for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP, the authentication fails and the host cannot connect to the array.
• Case B: If the host’s user information is registered on the iSCSI target, but authentication of the host is disabled
The iSCSI target does not perform authentication of the host. The host connects to the array without authentication regardless of whether or not the host is configured for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP.
CAUTION:
If a host uses Microsoft iSCSI Initiator and is configured for authentication by iSCSI targets with
CHAP, authentication of the host fails. To allow such a host to connect to the iSCSI target without authentication, do not configure it for authentication by ports with CHAP.
• Case C: If the host’s user information is not registered on the iSCSI target
52
Overview of LUN Manager
Regardless of the setting on the host, the iSCSI target performs authentication of the host, but results in a failure. The host cannot connect to the array.
• Case D: When connecting via an iSCSI target that does not perform authentication of hosts
The host connects to the array without authentication of the host regardless of whether or not the host is configured for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP.
In this case, although you do not need to register the host’s user information on the iSCSI target, you can register the user information.
CAUTION:
If a host uses Microsoft iSCSI Initiator and is configured for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP, authentication of the host fails. To allow such a host to connect to the port without authentication, do not configure it for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP.
NOTE:
You should register the user information for all hosts to be connected to an iSCSI target that performs authentication of hosts. To allow a specific host to connect to such an iSCSI target without authentication, configure the iSCSI target and the host as follows:
• On the iSCSI target:
Register the user information of the host you want to allow to connect without authentication, and then disable the host’s authentication setting.
• On the host:
It does not matter if you configure the host for authentication by ports with CHAP.
However, if the host uses Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, do not configure the host for authentication by ports with CHAP.
shows an example of authentication of hosts. In this figure, iSCSI names of host bus adapters
(HBAs) are abbreviated as a, b, and so on.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
53
Figure 13 Example of authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments)
In
Figure 13 , iSCSI target 1 performs authentication of hosts, but iSCSI target 2 does not.
Host A’s user information is registered on iSCSI target 1, and the authentication setting is enabled.
Therefore, if authentication of the host succeeds, Host A can connect to the array (or processing goes to the authentication of the iSCSI target). As a precondition of successful authentication, configure Host A for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP.
Host B’s user information is also registered on iSCSI target 1, but the authentication setting is disabled.
Therefore, Host B can connect to the array without authentication. (If Host B uses Microsoft iSCSI Initiator,
Host B can connect to the array only when Host B is not configured for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP.)
Host C’s user information is not registered on iSCSI target 1. Therefore, when Host C tries to connect to the array, authentication fails and the connection request is denied regardless of Host C’s setting.
Host D is attached to iSCSI target 2, which does not perform authentication of hosts. Therefore, Host D can connect to the array without authentication. In this case, it does not matter whether Host D’s user information is registered on iSCSI target 2. (If Host D uses Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, Host D can connect to the array only when Host D is not configured for authentication by iSCSI targets with CHAP.)
For more information, see:
• Enabling and disabling authentication of hosts on iSCSI targets
• Registering a host's user information on an iSCSI target
• Settings and connection results in authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments) .
54
Overview of LUN Manager
For more information about configuring hosts, see the documentation for the operating system and iSCSI driver in your environment.
Authentication of iSCSI targets (performing mutual authentication)
When authentication of a host succeeds, the host performs authentication of the iSCSI target in reverse if the host requires (mutual authentication). In authentication of iSCSI targets, when the user information
(user name and secret) of the iSCSI target specified on the iSCSI target side matches the user information stored on the host, the host allows the iSCSI target to connect.
For more information about iSCSI target settings to perform authentication of iSCSI targets, see
Specifying an iSCSI target's user information (when performing mutual authentication)
. For more information about configuring hosts, see the documentation for the operating system and iSCSI driver in your environment.
NAS channel adapters
You can use LUN Manager to check the running status of the OSs on NAS channel adapters. Also, when a failure occurs in the OS, you can operate (restart, stop, or start) the OS using LUN Manager without going to the array’s cabinet. For instructions on checking the OS status on NAS channel adapters and operating the OSs, see
Operating NAS channel adapters
.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
55
56
Overview of LUN Manager
2 Preparing to use LUN Manager
System requirements
To use LUN Manager, you need:
• XP12000/XP10000/SVS200 array
• LUN Manager optional program
• WWW client computer connected to the array via a LAN
To use LUN Manager, you must use the WWW client computer to log on to the SVP. When you are logged on, Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console, which is a Java® applet, is downloaded to the WWW client computer. You can perform LUN Manager operations in Command View XP or XP
Remote Web Console.
For more information about requirements for WWW client computers, see the HP StorageWorks
Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user
guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
Configuring WWW client computers
LUN Manager operations require Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console, which is downloaded to the WWW client computer. The WWW client computer must be connected to the array via a
LAN. Browser settings are also required on the WWW client computer. For more information, see the
HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote
Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
Enabling required software
For more information about enabling LUN Manager, see the HP StorageWorks Command View
XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for
XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
Notes on using LUN Manager
• If you attempt to apply numerous settings in the LUN Manager panes, the SVP might be unable to continue processing. HP recommends that you make up to approximately 1,000 settings.
Numerous settings are likely to be made when alternate paths are defined (see
for defining alternate paths.
• Do not remove LU paths (see
) when hosts perform I/O processing.
• Do not disable LUN security (see
) when hosts perform I/O processing.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
57
58
Preparing to use LUN Manager
3 LUN Manager panes
When you start LUN Manager, the Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console main pane displays the LUN Manager, Port, and Authentication panes.
This chapter describes these panes.
LUN Manager pane
When you click the icon in the Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console main pane, LUN
Manager starts and the LUN Manager pane appears. Use the LUN Manager pane to define LU paths and apply LUN security to logical volumes.
NOTE:
Storage partition administrators can display information or operate only within the allocated storage management logical partition (SLPR). For more information about SLPRs, see the
HP StorageWorks
XP Disk/Cache Partition user guide
.
Figure 14 LUN Manager pane (icon under Fibre folder selected)
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
59
Figure 15 LUN Manager pane (icon under iSCSI folder selected)
LU Path tree
Use this tree to find information about LU paths. When you select a host group from this tree, the table on the right displays information about LU paths associated with the selected host group.
The Subsystem folder is located at the top of the tree. The Fibre, NAS, and iSCSI folders appear below the Subsystem folder.
Fibre folder
If you double-click the Fibre folder, Fibre Channel ports in the array appear as icons. The port name, port address, LUN security status, and port attribute (that is, whether the port is an initiator, target, RCU target, or external port) appear on the right of each icon.
NOTE:
The Fibre folder does not appear if the array does not contain any Fibre Channel adapters.
60
LUN Manager panes
Figure 16 Fibre folder
Table 7 Fibre Channel port icons
Icon
Status
Port in Standard mode. LUN security is disabled on the port.
Port in Standard mode. LUN security is enabled on the port.
Port in High Speed mode. LUN security is disabled on the port.
Port in High Speed mode. LUN security is enabled on the port
Port in Initiator/External MIX mode. LUN security is disabled on the port.
Port in Initiator/External MIX mode. LUN security is enabled on the port.
When you double-click a Fibre Channel port in the tree, a list of host groups ( ) appears. The host group’s group number (G-ID), host group name, and host mode appear on the right of this icon. For more information about host modes, see
.
When you double-click a host group in the tree, a list of host bus adapters ( ) appears. The host bus adapter’s nickname and World Wide Name (WWN) appear on the right of this icon. For more information about WWNs, see
Finding an open-system host's World Wide Name (WWN)
.
NOTE:
Host bus adapters are adapters contained in host computers and are used as ports for connecting hosts and the array.
When you double-click a port on which LUN security is disabled to display a list of host groups, host groups except the first host group (that is, host group 0) are grayed out.
NAS folder
If you double-click the NAS folder, NAS ports in the array appear as icons. Four port names appear on the right of each icon. The channel adapter name appears on the right of the port names. The channel adapter name is enclosed by parentheses.
NOTE:
The NAS folder does not appear if the array does not contain NAS channel adapters.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
61
Figure 17 NAS folder
Table 8 NAS port icons
Icon
Status
You can assign paths from this NAS port to logical volumes.
You cannot assign paths from this NAS port to logical volumes because of a hardware failure or another reasons.
When you double-click a NAS port, the following host groups appear:
• NAS-Sys: When selected, information about paths to system LUs appears in the list on the right.
The list contents are grayed out and cannot be changed.
The group number (G-ID) of this host group is 00.
• User: When selected, information about paths to user LUs appears in the list on the right.
The group number (G-ID) of this host group is 01.
iSCSI folder
If you double-click the iSCSI folder, iSCSI ports in the array appear as icons. The port name and attribute appear on the right of each icon.
NOTE:
• The iSCSI folder does not appear if the array does not contain iSCSI channel adapters.
• iSCSI ports always have the Target attribute.
62
LUN Manager panes
Figure 18 iSCSI folder
Table 9 iSCSI port icons
Icon Status
LUN security is not applied to the port.
LUN security is applied to the port
When you double-click an iSCSI port in the tree, a list of iSCSI targets ( ) appears. The iSCSI target’s group number (G-ID), name, and host mode appear on the right of this icon. For more information about host modes, see
When you double-click an iSCSI target in the tree, a list of host bus adapters ( ) appears. The host bus adapter’s nickname and iSCSI name appear on the right of this icon.
NOTE:
Host bus adapters are adapters contained in host computers and are used as ports for connecting hosts and the array.
When you double-click a port to which LUN security is not applied to display a list of iSCSI targets, iSCSI targets except for the first group (that is, iSCSI target 0) are grayed out.
LU Path table
A table appears on the right side and displays LU path information about the host group selected in the tree.
• LUN: LUNs assigned to logical volumes. LUNs (logical unit numbers) are addresses assigned to logical units (LUs), which are logical volumes that open-system hosts can access. If no paths are defined, the other columns on the right are blank.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
63
Table 10 LUN status icons
Icon Status
Logical volume to which an LU path is defined
Expanded LU
Command device
Command device security
Remote command device
LUN to which no LU path is defined
• CU:LDEV: CU image numbers appear on the left of the colon. LDEV numbers appear on the right of the colon. The combination of a CU image number and an LDEV number is used to identify a logical volume.
If an LDEV number ends with #, the logical volume is an external LU.
If an LDEV number ends with V, the logical volume is a virtual volume.
• Emulation: Logical volume’s (or logical device’s) emulation type.
For CV volumes, CVS appears on the right of the emulation type.
For LUSE volumes, an asterisk (*) and a number appear on the right of the emulation type. For example, OPEN-9*3 indicates that three OPEN-9 volumes are combined.
• Capacity: Logical volume’s size.
• RAID: Logical volume’s RAID level.
If the logical volume is an external or virtual volume, the RAID column displays a hyphen (-) instead of the RAID level.
• Paths: Number of alternate paths, if any.
• VMA: Access Attribute: Logical volume’s access attribute. If a VMA is set on a logical volume,
VMA: appears at the beginning of the access attribute. If extents are set on a logical volume,
VMA(Ext): appears at the beginning of the access attribute.
The following appear below the table:
• Selected LUNs: Number of LUNs selected in the table.
• Remaining LUNs (Port): Number of LUNs to which no LU path has been defined.
Indicates the number of LU paths you can add to the port specified in the tree.
• Remaining LUNs (GRP): Number of LUNs to which no LU path has been defined.
Indicates the number of LU paths you can add to the host group specified in the tree.
Lower-left list
The WWN name table or iSCSI name table appears at the lower left of the LUN Manager pane. The
WWN name table appears when you select an item related to a Fibre Channel port from the tree. The iSCSI name table appears when you select an item related to an iSCSI port from the tree.
WWN name table
Lists host bus adapters connected to Fibre Channel ports on the array.
64 LUN Manager panes
Figure 19 WWN name table
• Port: List of ports. The port’s fibre address appears on the right of the port name.
• Host Group: Host groups that are used to classify server hosts connected to the array. You must create host groups in the LUN Manager pane.
• Name: Host bus adapter’s nickname. You can specify nicknames in the LUN Manager pane.
• WWN: Host bus adapter’s World Wide Name.
iSCSI name table
Lists host bus adapters connected to the iSCSI ports on the array.
Figure 20 iSCSI name table
• Port: List of ports.
• Target name: iSCSI targets are used to classify server hosts connected to the array. You must create iSCSI targets in the LUN Manager pane.
• Name: Host bus adapter’s nickname. You can specify nicknames in the LUN Manager pane.
• iSCSI name: Host bus adapter’s iSCSI name.
LDEV table
Lists logical volumes in the array.
• CU: List of CU images.
• LDEV: Logical volumes. The CU image number appears on the left of the colon. The LDEV number appears on the right of the colon. The combination of a CU image number and an LDEV number identifies a logical volume.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
65
Table 11 LDEV status icons
Icon
Status
Normal logical volume
Expanded LU (that is, a LUSE volume)
Volume the Customized Volume feature is applied to (that is, a CVS volume)
Command device
Command device security
Remote command device
If an LDEV number ends with #, the logical volume is an external LU.
If an LDEV number ends with V, the logical volume is a virtual volume.
• Emulation: Logical volume’s emulation type.
For CV volumes, CVS appears on the right of the emulation type.
For LUSE volumes, an asterisk (*) and a number appear on the right of the emulation type. For example, OPEN-9*3 indicates that three OPEN-9 volumes are combined.
• Capacity: Logical volume’s size.
• RAID: Logical volume’s RAID level.
If the logical volume is an external LU or virtual volume, the RAID column displays a hyphen (-) instead of a RAID level.
• Parity Group: Parity group’s name.
If the name begins with E, the group is an external LU group consisting of one or more external LUs.
If the name begins with V, the group is a V-VOL group consisting of one or more virtual volumes.
• Paths: Number of alternate paths, if any.
• VMA:Access Attribute: Logical volume’s access attribute. If a VMA is set on a logical volume,
VMA: appears at the beginning of the access attribute. If extents are set on a logical volume,
VMA(Ext): appears at the beginning of the access attribute.
The number of logical volumes selected in the table appears below the table.
NOTE:
The LDEV table does not contain volumes reserved by Auto LUN XP.
Buttons
• Add WWN: Registers host bus adapters in a host group. Before using this button, you must select a host group in the LU Path tree, and select host bus adapters (WWNs) in the WWN name table.
NOTE:
If you select an item related to NAS or iSCSI ports, you cannot use the Add WWN button.
• Add iSCSI name: Registers host bus adapters in an iSCSI target. Before using this button, you must select an iSCSI target below the iSCSI folder in the LU Path tree, and select host bus adapters
(iSCSI names) in the iSCSI name table.
66
LUN Manager panes
NOTE:
If you select an item related to Fibre Channel or NAS ports, you cannot use the Add iSCSI name button.
• Add LU Path: Defines LU paths to logical volumes. Before using this button, you must select LUNs in the LU Path tree and select logical volumes in the LDEV table.
• Apply: Applies settings in the pane to the array.
• Cancel: Cancels settings in the pane.
Port pane
When you click the icon in the Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console main pane, LUN
Manager starts. LUN Manager includes the Port pane, which you use to make settings for Fibre Channel and iSCSI ports. Also, in NAS environments, you can operate the NAS channel adapter’s OS from the
Port pane.
The content of the Port pane changes depending on the selection in the Package tree. If you select an icon under the Fibre folder,
appears. If you select an icon under the iSCSI folder,
appears. If you select an icon under the NAS folder,
appears.
NOTE:
Storage partition administrators can display ports and operate only within the allocated SLPR. For more information about SLPRs, see the
HP StorageWorks XP Disk/Cache Partition user guide
.
Figure 21 Port pane (icon under Fibre folder selected)
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
67
Figure 22 Port pane (icon under iSCSI folder selected)
Figure 23 Port pane (icon under NAS folder selected)
Package tree
Use this tree to select the port to be operated on. The Fibre, NAS, and iSCSI folders appear under the
Subsystem folder at the top of the tree.
Fibre folder
When you double-click the Fibre folder, the folder opens and lists Fibre Channel channel adapters
(CHAs). When you double-click a channel adapter, port blocks appear below the channel adapter.
The following icons are used.
68
LUN Manager panes
Table 12 Channel adapter and port block icons (Fibre folder)
Icon Status
Channel adapter package. All ports in this channel adapter package are in Standard mode.
Channel adapter package. All or some ports in this channel adapter package are in High Speed mode.
Channel adapter package. All or some ports in this channel adapter package are in
Initiator/External MIX mode.
Port block in a channel adapter package. Ports in this port block are in Standard mode.
Port block in a channel adapter package. Ports in this port block are in High Speed mode.
Port block in a channel adapter package. Ports in this port block are in Initiator/External MIX mode.
iSCSI folder
When you double-click the iSCSI folder, the folder opens and lists iSCSI channel adapter packages.
Table 13 Channel adapter package icons (iSCSI folder)
Icon
Status iSCSI channel adapter package.
NAS folder
When you double-click the NAS folder, the folder opens and lists NAS channel adapters ( ). The NAS channel adapter’s name and NAS channel adapter OS’s running status appear on the right of the icon.
Port table
This table appears when you select an icon under the Fibre folder in the Package tree.
If you select a channel adapter in the tree, the Port table displays all ports on the channel adapter.
If you select a port block, the Port table displays all ports in the port block.
You can use options in the Change Port Mode box to change information in this list.
Information in this list differs depending on the type of channel adapter package selected in the tree.
• If you select a Fibre Channel channel adapter, the list displays information about Fibre Channel ports.
Figure 24 Port table (Fibre Channel ports)
• Port Name: Port name. For more information, see
,
,
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
69
• Type: Port‘s type. Fibre indicates a Fibre Channel port, which is used for connecting open-system hosts.
• Host Speed: Fibre Channel port’s data transfer speed. The unit is Gbps (gigabits per second).
• Addr (Loop ID): Port‘s address.
• Fabric: Indicates if a fabric switch is used.
• Connection: Topology. The default is FC-AL. However, you must be aware that some fabric switches require you to specify the point-to-point topology. If your system uses a fabric switch, check the fabric switch’s documentation to determine whether the switch requires the point-to-point topology.
• Attribute: Indicates whether the port is an initiator, target, RCU target, or external port.
• WWN: Host bus adapter’s WWN.
• If you select an iSCSI channel adapter, the list displays information about iSCSI ports and iSNS servers.
Figure 25 Port table (iSCSI ports and iSNS servers)
• Port Name: iSCSI port’s name. For more information, see
,
.
• IP Address: iSCSI port’s IP address.
• Subnet Mask: Subnet mask.
• Gateway: Gateway address.
• Port No.: iSCSI port’s number.
• Keep Alive Timer: Keep-alive timer value. The unit is seconds.
• iSNS Server: Indicates whether you can register the iSCSI port in the iSNS server.
• Enable: You can register the iSCSI port.
• Disable: You cannot register the iSCSI port.
• iSNS IP Address: iSNS server’s IP address.
• iSNS Port No.: iSNS server’s TCP port number.
• MAC Address: iSCSI port’s MAC address (media access control address).
• Attribute: Port’s attribute.
NOTE: iSCSI ports always have the Target attribute.
70
LUN Manager panes
iSCSI Function box
Use this box to perform iSCSI-related operations.
Figure 26 iSCSI Function box
• Ping: Issues a ping command from an iSCSI port to a host.
• Register: Registers information about iSCSI ports in the iSNS server.
• Delete: Removes information about iSCSI ports from the iSNS server.
Change Port Mode box
This box appears when you select an icon under the Fibre folder in the Package tree.
Use this box to change information in the Port table.
Information in this box differs depending on the type of channel adapter package selected in the tree:
• If you select a Fibre Channel channel adapter, this box displays items related to Fibre Channel ports.
Figure 27 Change Port Mode box (Fibre Channel ports)
• Select a Port: To change settings for a port, select the port from this list.
• Host Speed: The text box on the left displays the selected port’s data transfer speed.
Use the list on the right to specify the selected port’s data transfer speed. If you select Auto, the array automatically sets the data transfer speed to 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps. Gbps is the acronym for
Gigabits per second.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
71
NOTE:
If you are using a 2 Gbps HBA and switch, set the CHF port’s transfer speed to 2 Gbps. If you are using a 1 Gbps HBA and switch, set the CHF port’s transfer speed to 1 Gbps. If the Auto
Negotiation setting is required, the linkup might be incorrect at server reboot. Check the channel lamp. If it is blinking, remove and re-insert the cable to perform the signal synchronization and linkup.
• Fibre Addr.: The text box on the left displays the selected port’s address.
Use the list on the right to specify the selected port’s address.
• Fabric: The text box on the left indicates whether a fabric switch is used. This option must be set to ON if a fabric switch is used. This option must be set to OFF if a fabric switch is not used.
Use the list on the right to specify whether a fabric switch is used.
• Connection: The text box on the left indicates the topology. This text box can display FC-AL or P-to-P (point-to-point).
Use the list on the right to specify the topology.
CAUTION:
Some fabric switches require you to specify the point-to-point topology. If your system uses a fabric switch, check the fabric switch’s documentation to determine whether the fabric switch requires the point-to-point topology.
• Set: Applies settings in the Change Port Mode box to the Port table.
• Clear: Cancels settings in the Change Port Mode box.
• If you select an iSCSI channel adapter, this box displays items related to iSCSI ports and iSNS servers (for more information, see
iSCSI port and iSNS server settings ).
Figure 28 Change Port Mode box (iSCSI port and iSNS server)
• Select a Port: To change a port’s settings, select the port from this list.
• IP Address: Selected port’s IP address.
• Subnet Mask: Subnet mask.
• Gateway: Gateway address.
• Port Number: Port number.
• Keep Alive Timer: Keep-alive timer value. The unit is seconds.
• iSNS Server: Specifies whether to register information about the iSCSI port in the iSNS server.
• Enable: Registers the iSCSI port.
• Disable: Does not register the iSCSI port.
• IP Address of iSNS Server: iSNS server’s IP address.
• Port Number of iSNS Server: iSNS server’s TCP port number.
72
LUN Manager panes
• Set: Applies settings in the Change Port Mode box to the Port table.
CHN list
This list appears if you select an icon under the NAS folder in the Package tree. CHN is the channel adapter for NAS.
The CHN list displays all NAS channel adapters. When you select a channel adapter in the Package tree, the CHN list displays information of the selected channel adapter. Information displayed in the
CHN list is shown in
Figure 29 CHN list (NAS channel adapters)
• CHN Name: NAS channel adapter’s name.
• OS Status: Running status of the NAS channel adapter’s OS. Statuses are:
• NEW: OS is not installed on the channel adapter or is being installed.
• UP: OS is started.
• DOWN: OS stopped normally.
• DOWN (Failure): OS stopped due to a failure.
• BUSY (Boot): OS is being started.
• BUSY (Shutdown): OS is being stopped.
• ERROR: OS is being stopped due to a failure.
• DUMP: Hibernation dump is being collected.
• DUMP SKIP: Hibernation dump collection is skipped.
• HUNG UP: OS is freezing.
• UNKNOWN: OS status collection failed.
If the status is UP, you can use LUN Manager to stop the OS. If the status is DOWN or DOWN
(Failure), you can use LUN Manager to start the OS.
• Setting: Specified operation for the channel adapter’s OS. This column is blank before specifying an operation. After specifying an operation, Reboot, Boot, or Shut Down appears. If you click
Apply, this column returns to a blank.
Buttons
• Apply: Applies settings in the pane to the array.
• Cancel: Cancels settings in the pane.
• Reboot: Appears when select an icon under the NAS folder in the Package tree. Restarts an OS in UP status selected in the CHN list.
• Shut Down: Appears when you select an icon under the NAS folder in the Package tree. Stops an OS in UP status selected in the CHN list.
• Boot: Appears when you select an icon under the NAS folder in the Package tree. Starts an OS in DOWN or DOWN (Failure) status selected in the CHN list.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
73
Authentication pane
When you click the icon in the Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console main pane, LUN
Manager starts. The LUN Manager pane includes the Authentication pane, which you can use to make settings for user authentication. User authentication can be performed in Fibre Channel and iSCSI environments.
Figure 30 Authentication pane (Fibre folder selected)
74 LUN Manager panes
Figure 31 Authentication pane (port icon under Fibre folder selected)
Figure 32 Authentication pane (icon under iSCSI folder selected)
Port tree
Use this tree to find information about user authentication on each port. When you select a port from this tree, the Authentication information (Target) list on the right displays user information for hosts registered on the port. In addition, the Authentication information (Host) list displays the selected port’s user information.
The iSCSI folder appears below the Subsystem folder located at the top of the tree.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
75
Fibre folder
If you double-click the Fibre folder, Fibre Channel ports in the array appear as icons. If you double-click a
Fibre Channel port, host groups appear as icons. The host group name appears on the right of each icon. When the icon appears, the host group performs authentication of hosts. When the appears, the host group does not perform authentication of hosts. By default, the for all host group icons.
icon icon appears
NOTE:
The Fibre folder appears only if the array contains a Fibre Channel adapter.
Figure 33 Fibre folder
Table 14 Fibre Channel port and Fibre Channel host group icons
Icon
Status
Fibre channel port.
CLX-Y host group name
Host group performs authentication of hosts.
host group name
Host group does not perform authentication of hosts.
iSCSI folder
If you double-click the iSCSI folder, iSCSI ports in the array appear as icons. If you double-click an iSCSI port, iSCSI targets appear as icons. The iSCSI name appears on the right of each icon. When the icon appears, the iSCSI target performs authentication of hosts. When the icon appears, the iSCSI target does not perform authentication of hosts. By default, the icon appears for all iSCSI targets.
NOTE:
The iSCSI folder appears only if the array contains an iSCSI channel adapter.
76
LUN Manager panes
Figure 34 iSCSI folder
Table 15 iSCSI port and iSCSI target status icons
Icon Status iSCSI port.
CLX-Y iSCSI name iSCSI target performs authentication of hosts.
iSCSI name iSCSI target does not perform authentication of hosts.
Port Information list
• Port Name: Fibre Channel port name. For more information, see
,
• Time out: Period of time between authentication sessions to the same port. If the previous authentication session to a port failed, the next authentication session starts after the specified period of time elapses. The unit is seconds.
• Refusal Intvl.: If authentication fails for the number of times specified in Refusal Freq., connection to the port fails. Refusal Intvl. is the interval from when connection to a port fails to when the next authentication session starts. The unit is minutes.
• Refusal Freq.: Number of times of authentication for connecting to a port is allowed. If authentication fails for the specified number of times, connection to the port fails.
FC Switch Information list
• Port Name: Fibre Channel port name. For more information, see
,
• User Name: Fibre Channel switch’s user name.
• Mode: Mode of authentication between ports and Fibre Channel switches. If the authentication mode is mutual, bi-directional appears. If the authentication mode is not mutual, unidirectional appears.
• Authentication: Specifies if authentication for the Fibre Channel switch is performed. If the Fibre
Channel switch is a target of user authentication, Enable appears. If the host is not a target of user authentication, Disable appears.
Authentication information (Target) list
Fibre folder
Displays user information for host groups allowed to connect to the port or host group selected in the tree.
• Group Name: Host group name.
• User Name: Host group’s user name. When a user name is not defined for a host group, this column is blank.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
77
• Authentication: Specifies if authentication for the host is performed. If the host is a target of user authentication, Enable appears. If the host is not a target of user authentication, Disable appears.
iSCSI folder
Displays user information for iSCSI targets allowed to connect to the port or iSCSI target selected in the tree.
• Target Name: iSCSI target’s iSCSI name.
• User Name: iSCSI target’s user name. When a user name is not defined for an iSCSI target, this column is blank.
• Authentication: Indicates whether authentication of the host is performed. If the host is a target of user authentication, Enable appears. If the host is not a target of user authentication, Disable appears.
Authentication Information (Host) list
Fibre folder
Displays host user information for the port or host group selected in the tree.
In this list, you can register up to 64 user information items.
• Group Name: Host group name.
• User Name: Host’s user names. When a user name is not defined for a host, this column is blank.
• Protocol: Protocol used in the user authentication.
iSCSI folder
Displays host user information for the port or iSCSI target selected in the tree.
In this list, you can register up to 64 user information items.
• Target Name: Host bus adapter’s iSCSI name.
• User Name: Host’s user name. When a user name is not defined for a host, this column is blank.
• Protocol: Protocol used in the user authentication.
Buttons
• Apply: Applies settings in the pane to the array.
• Cancel: Cancels settings in the pane.
78
LUN Manager panes
4 LUN Manager operations
This chapter describes how to start LUN Manager and various LUN Manager operations, such as defining LU paths.
Starting LUN Manager
1.
Start the Web browser.
2.
Enter the following URL in the Web browser, and press Enter. The Storage Device List appears.
http://IP-address-of-main-SVP (Web server)/cgi-bin/utility/sjc0000.cgi
NOTE:
If you are unsure of the IP address of the main SVP (Web server), ask the system administrator.
3.
In the Storage Device List, click the SVP to log onto. The Command View XP or XP Remote Web
Console login pane appears.
4.
Enter the user name and password, and click OK. The Command View XP or XP Remote Web
Console main pane appears.
5.
Click the LUN Manager button ( ). LUN Manager starts, and the LUN Manager pane appears.
You must change Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console to Modify mode to use LUN Manager.
When the background color of the icon on the right of the pane is light yellow ( ), the pane is in Modify mode. When the background color is gray ( ), it is in View mode. If you click the ( ) icon when the
Unlocked icon ( ) appears, the icon changes to ( ), and the mode changes to Modify. For more information about changing modes, see the HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk
Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
Defining LU paths
If you are configuring a Fibre Channel environment, complete the following major steps:
1. Finding an open-system host's World Wide Name (WWN)
3. Registering hosts in host groups
4. Associating host groups or iSCSI targets to logical volumes
If you are configuring an iSCSI environment, complete the following major steps:
2. Registering hosts in host groups
3. Associating host groups or iSCSI targets to logical volumes
If you are configuring a NAS environment, complete the procedure described in
Associating host groups or iSCSI targets to logical volumes
.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
79
Creating host groups
NOTE:
If you are configuring a NAS environment, you do not need to follow the procedures described in this section. For instructions on defining LU paths in NAS environments, see
Associating host groups or iSCSI targets to logical volumes .
Creating host groups (when configuring Fibre Channel environments)
You can connect multiple server hosts of different platforms to one port on the array. When configuring the system, you must group server hosts connected to the array by host groups. For example, if HP-UX and
Windows hosts are connected to a port, you must create one host group for HP-UX hosts and another host group for Windows hosts. Next, you must register HP-UX hosts to the corresponding host group and register Windows hosts to the other host group.
The following procedure describes how to create host groups. The procedure for registering hosts to a host group is described in
Registering hosts in host groups .
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
Right-click the port for which you want to create a host group, and select Add New Host Group. The
Add New Host Group pane appears.
NOTE:
If you right-click an initiator port, you cannot select Add New Host Group. You cannot create host groups for initiator ports.
Figure 35 Add New Host Group pane
3.
In the Group Name box, enter the host group name.
It is convenient if you name each host group after the host platform. For example, when creating a host group to register Windows NT® hosts in, the host group name can be wnt.
A host group name can consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols).
However, you cannot use the following symbols for host group names:
\ / : , ; * ? " < > |
You cannot use spaces for the first and last characters in host group names.
Host group names are case-sensitive. For example, host group names wnt and Wnt represent different host groups.
4.
In the Host Mode list, select a host mode. When selecting a host mode, you must consider the platform and other factors (see
80
LUN Manager operations
CAUTION:
Do not select Reserve from the list. Reserve indicates that the host mode is not currently supported.
5.
If necessary, click Option, and select the host mode options. For more information about host mode options, see
.
Figure 36 Add New Host Group pane (Option selected)
6.
Click OK. If a message appears, click OK. The host group name and host mode appear in blue.
7.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
8.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
81
Table 16 Host modes for host groups
Host mode
1
00 Standard
03 HP
04 Sequest
05 OpenVMS
07 Tru64
When to select this mode
When registering Red Hat Linux or IRIX server hosts in the host group
When registering HP-UX server hosts in the host group
When registering DYNIX/ptx server hosts in the host group
When registering OpenVMS server hosts in the host group
When registering Tru64® server hosts in the host group
09 Solaris
0A NetWare
0C Windows
When registering Solaris® server hosts in the host group
When registering NetWare® server hosts in the host group
When registering Windows server hosts in the host group 2
Using I/O fencing function of VERITAS Cluster Server 4.0
Using VERITAS DataBase Edition/Active Cluster
Using VERITAS Storage Foundation for Oracle RAC
0F AIX
2C Windows Extension
4C UVM
When registering AIX® server hosts in the host group
When registering Windows server hosts in the host group 2
When registering another array in the host group for mapping by External
Storage XP.
(Use this mode to map logical volumes in the array on which LUN manager is installed to another array on which External Storage XP is installed as the data is succeeded with the same emulation type.)
60 Standard Extension 2 When registering Red Hat Linux server hosts or IRIX server hosts in the host group
63 HP Extension 2 When registering HP-UX server hosts in the host group
69 Solaris Extension 2 When registering Solaris server hosts in the host group
6C Windows Extension 2 When registering Windows server hosts in the host group (This mode works the same as host mode 2C. 3
6F AIX Extension 2
When registering AIX server hosts in the host group.
3
1
2
Besides the host modes mentioned here, the Host Mode list displays the Reserve mode. Do not select this host mode.
If you register Windows server hosts in a host group, ensure that the host group’s host mode is 0C Windows or 2C Windows
Extension. If you are thinking about creating LUSE volumes (that is, expanded LUs), consider setting the host group’s host mode to 2C Windows Extension.
If the host group’s host mode is 0C Windows and an LU path is defined between the host group and a logical volume, you cannot combine the logical volume with other logical volumes to form a LUSE volume (that is, an expanded LU). For more information about
LUSE, see
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
.
3
If you are using any VERITAS products: I/O fencing function of VERITAS Cluster Server 4.0, VERITAS DataBase Edition/Active
Cluster, VERITAS Storage Foundation for Oracle RAC, you must select this host mode. When selecting a host mode, you must consider the platform and some other factors.
NOTE:
If you register Windows server hosts in a host group, you need to ensure that the host mode of the host group is 0C: Windows, 2C: Windows Extension or 6C: Windows Extension 2. If you are thinking about creating LUSE volumes (i.e., expanded LUs), you should consider setting the host mode 2C: Windows
Extension or 6C: Windows Extension 2 to the host group. If the host mode of a host group is 2C:
Windows Extension or 6C: Windows Extension 2 and an LU path is defined, you can create a LUSE volume (i.e., an expanded LU). If the host mode of a host group is 0C: Windows and an LU path is defined between the host group and a logical volume, you cannot combine the logical volume with other logical volumes to form a LUSE volume (i.e., an expanded LU). For detailed information about LUSE,
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size .
82
LUN Manager operations
Table 17 Host mode options
No.
2
Host mode option
VERITAS Database
Edition/Advanced
Cluster
When to select this option
When VERITAS Database Edition/Advanced Cluster for Real
Application Clusters or VERITAS Cluster Server 4.0 (I/O fencing function) is used
6 TPRLO
7
Automatic recognition function of LUN
When all the following conditions are satisfied:
• Host mode 0C Windows or 2C Windows Extension is used
• Emulex host bus adapters are used
• Mini-port drivers are used
• TPRLO=2 is specified for the host bus adapter’s mini-port driver parameter
When all the following conditions are satisfied:
• Host mode 00 Standard or 09 Solaris is used
• SUN StorEdge SAN Foundation Software Version 4.2 or later is used
• You want to automate recognition of increase and decrease of devices when a genuine SUN HBA is connected
12
13
14
Undisplay function of ghost LUN
When all the following conditions are satisfied:
• Host mode 03 HP is used
• You want to suppress creation of device files for devices to which paths are not defined
SIM report at link failure When you want to be informed by service information message (SIM) that the number of link failures detected between ports exceeds the threshold.
HP TruCluster with
Continuous Access XP function
When all the following conditions are satisfied:
• Host mode 07 Tru64 is used
• You want to use TruCluster to set a cluster to the Continuous Access
XP P-VOL and S-VOL, respectively
Creating iSCSI targets (when configuring iSCSI environments)
You can connect multiple server hosts on different platforms to one port on the array. When configuring the system, you must group server hosts connected to the array by iSCSI targets. For example, if HP-UX and Windows hosts are connected to a port, you must create one iSCSI target for HP-UX hosts and another iSCSI target for Windows hosts. Next, you must register HP-UX hosts to the corresponding iSCSI target and register Windows hosts to the other iSCSI target.
The following procedure describes how to create iSCSI targets. The procedure for registering hosts to an iSCSI target is described in
Registering hosts in host groups .
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
) appears.
2.
Right-click the port for which you want to create an iSCSI target, and select Add New iSCSI Target.
The Add New iSCSI Target pane appears.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
83
Figure 37 Add New iSCSI Target pane
3.
In the Target name box, enter the iSCSI target name.
In the Target name box, the initial value in iqn format appears as a default value. iSCSI target names must be specified in either of the following formats:
• eui format:
An IEEE 64-bit Extended Unique Identifier used to specify an iSCSI name. The iSCSI name begins with eui. and is followed by the ID found by the vendor in EUI-64 format similar to the
World Wide Name.
Example: eui.02004567A425678D
• iqn format:
The iSCSI Qualified Name format used to specify an iSCSI name. For more information about specifying iSCSI names using this format, see the iSCSI-related documentation.
If a host is connected to an iSCSI port, LUN Manager automatically displays the iSCSI name in
iqn format. iSCSI names can include 0 (zero) to 9, and a to f (letters are case-insensitive).
Example: iqn.2006.01.com.hp:iscsi-r500:model-xxx:sn-xxxxxx:lun00
The length of an iSCSI name must be 20 characters in eui format, and up to 223 characters in iqn format. iSCSI names can include letters, numbers, periods (.), hyphens (-), and colons (:); but cannot include double-byte characters. iSCSI names are case-insensitive.
4.
In the Target alias box, enter the iSCSI target’s alias.
iSCSI target aliases can include letters, numbers, periods (.), hyphens (-), and colons (:); but cannot include double-byte characters. iSCSI target aliases are case-sensitive. An iSCSI target alias can consist of up to 32 characters
5.
In the Host Mode list, select a host mode. When selecting a host mode, you must consider the platform and other factors (for more information, see
CAUTION:
Do not select Reserve from the list. Reserve indicates that the host mode is not currently supported.
6.
If necessary, click Option, and select host mode options. For more information about host mode options, see
84 LUN Manager operations
Figure 38 Add New iSCSI Target pane (Option selected)
NOTE:
After you click Option, the pane expands to display a list of host mode options. The No.
column indicates option numbers. Select the check box for the option you want to specify.
7.
Click OK. If a message appears, click OK. The iSCSI target name and host mode appear in blue.
8.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
9.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Registering hosts in host groups
NOTE:
If you are configuring a NAS environment, you do not need to follow the procedures described in this section. For instructions, see
Associating host groups or iSCSI targets to logical volumes .
To set LU paths, you must register hosts in host groups. For example, if HP-UX and Windows hosts are connected to a port, you must register the HP-UX and Windows hosts separately in two different host groups.
If you are configuring a Fibre Channel environment, follow the instructions in
Registering hosts in host groups (when configuring Fibre Channel environments)
. If you are configuring an iSCSI environment, follow the instructions in
Registering hosts in iSCSI targets (when configuring iSCSI environments)
.
Registering hosts in host groups (when configuring Fibre Channel environments)
When registering a host, you must specify the host bus adapter’s WWN. If you are unsure of the host bus adapter’s WWN, see
Finding an open-system host's World Wide Name (WWN) .
When registering a host, you can assign a nickname to the host bus adapter. If you assign a nickname, you can easily identify each host bus adapter in the LUN Manager pane. Although WWNs are also used to identify host bus adapters, the nickname you assign is more helpful because you can name host bus adapters after the host installation site or the host owners.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
85
NOTE:
• A nickname can consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). However, you cannot use the following characters for nicknames:
\ / : , ; * ? " < > |
• You cannot use spaces for the first or last character in nicknames.
• Nicknames are case-sensitive. For example, hp and HP are different nicknames.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
If the desired host has previously been connected via a cable to another port in the array, take the following steps:
a. In the WWN name table, select the port to which the host is connected from the Port list.
b. In the WWN name table, select the host bus adapter. From the tree, select a host group, and click Add WWN.
NOTE:
If you are using Windows, you can drag the host bus adapter from the WWN name table to the host group in the tree. To drag two or more host bus adapters, see the
HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP
Disk Arrays or the
HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for
XP12000/XP10000/SVS200 for instructions.
Figure 39 Add New WWN dialog box (when reg. a host prev. conn. to the array)
c. To assign a nickname to the host bus adapter, enter the nickname in the Nickname box, and click OK.
NOTE:
If you select two or more host bus adapters, Add New WWN dialog boxes ( Figure 39
) appear one after another to let you assign a nickname to each selected HBA. If you do not need to assign nicknames to HBAs, you can select The remaining WWNs do not need names, and click OK. If you select this option, the Add New WWN dialog box
(
Figure 39 ) no longer appears to prompt you to assign nicknames.
3.
If the desired host has never been connected via a cable to any port in the array, take the following steps:
a. In the tree, right-click the host group, and select Add New WWN. The Add New WWN pane appears.
86
LUN Manager operations
NOTE:
You cannot add WWNs to host groups for initiator ports.
Figure 40 Add New WWN dialog box (registering a host that has never been connected to the array)
b. In the WWN list, select the host bus adapter. If the list does not include the host bus adapter, enter the WWN in the WWN box.
c. If necessary, enter a nickname for the host bus adapter.
d. Click OK. If a message appears, click OK. The specified WWN and nickname appear below the selected host group.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array, and the specified host is registered in the host group.
NOTE:
If the WWN name table (located in the lower-left corner of the pane) includes the host you want to register, you can register the host by dragging the host from the WWN name table to the host group in the tree.
Registering hosts in iSCSI targets (when configuring iSCSI environments)
When registering a host, you must specify the host bus adapter’s iSCSI name.
When registering a host, you can assign a nickname for the host bus adapter. If you assign a nickname, you can easily identify each host bus adapter in the LUN Manager pane. Although iSCSI names are also used to identify each host bus adapter, the nickname you assign is more helpful because you can name host bus adapters after the host installation site or host owners.
NOTE:
• A nickname can consist of up to 32 ASCII characters (letters, numerals, and symbols). However, you cannot use the following characters for nicknames:
\ / : , ; * ? " < > |
• You cannot use spaces for the first and last characters in nicknames.
• Nicknames are case-sensitive. For example, hp and HP are different nicknames.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
) appears.
2.
If the host was previously connected via a cable to another port in the array, take the following steps:
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
87
a. In the iSCSI name table, select the port to which the host is connected from the Port list.
b. In the iSCSI name list, select the host bus adapter. From the tree, select an iSCSI target, and click Add iSCSI name.
Figure 41 Add New iSCSI name pane (registering a host that was previously connected to the array)
• In this list, only iSCSI names of hosts that issued login commands to ports appear.
Regardless of the sessions (Discovery or Normal) or results (Accept or Reject), up to
64 iSCSI names of hosts that recently issued login commands to each port appear.
However, if a host issues more than one instance of the login command to the same port, the host’s iSCSI name appears only once in the list.
To register iSCSI names using this list and register multiple hosts collectively to one port, you must register the iSCSI names to the port before the iSCSI names are deleted from this list. If the iSCSI names are deleted and you want to redisplay the iSCSI names in this list, you must reissue the login command from the hosts. In this case, you should operate the hosts that need to log in, and should not add unnecessary iSCSI names to this list.
• If you are using Windows, you can drag the host bus adapter from the iSCSI name table to the iSCSI target in the tree. To drag two or more host bus adapters, see the HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the
HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200
for instructions.
c. To assign a nickname to the host bus adapter, enter the nickname in the Nickname box, and click OK.
NOTE:
If you select two or more host bus adapters, Add New iSCSI name panes (
) appear one after another to let you assign nicknames to the selected HBAs. If you do not need to assign nicknames to HBAs, you can select The remaining iSCSI names do not need names, and click OK. If you select this option, the Add New iSCSI name
pane ( Figure 41 ) no longer appears to prompt you to assign nicknames.
3.
If the host has never been connected via a cable to any port in the array, take the following steps:
a. In the tree, right-click the iSCSI target, and select Add New iSCSI name. The Add New iSCSI name pane appears.
88
LUN Manager operations
Figure 42 Add New iSCSI name pane (registering a host that has never been connected to the array)
b. In the iSCSI name list, select the host bus adapter. If the list does not include the host bus adapter, enter the iSCSI name in the iSCSI name box.
c. If necessary, enter a nickname for the host bus adapter.
d. Click OK. The specified iSCSI name and nickname appear below the selected iSCSI target.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array, and the specified host is registered in the iSCSI target.
Associating host groups or iSCSI targets to logical volumes
Use LUN Manager to define LU paths by associating host groups or iSCSI targets to logical volumes. For example, if you associate a host group or iSCSI target consisting of three hosts with logical volumes, LU paths are defined between the three hosts and the logical volumes.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
or
2.
In the tree, select a host group or iSCSI target.
NOTE:
If you are configuring a NAS environment, you must select the User host group.
3.
In the CU list above the LDEV table, select a CU number. The LDEV table shows LDEVs in the specified CU image.
4.
In the LDEV table, select a logical volume. In the LU Path table, select LUNs indicated by the
(this icon indicates a LUN to which no LU path is defined). Click Add LU Path.
A message appears displaying information about LU paths to be defined.
icon
NOTE:
• If you are using Windows, you can drag a logical volume from the LDEV table to a LUN ( ) in the LU Path tree. To drag more than one logical volume, see the
HP
StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the
HP StorageWorks
XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200 for instructions.
• When you use the LU Path tree, you can use the CU list to switch between CU images.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
89
Figure 43 Information about LU paths to be defined (Fibre Channel environment)
Figure 44 Information about LU paths to be defined (iSCSI environment)
5.
Click OK. Settings are shown in the LU Path table, but not applied to the array yet.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array, and LU paths are defined.
Changing or viewing LU path settings
Deleting LU paths
CAUTION:
• Do not remove LU paths when host I/O is in progress.
• Before deleting a path to a NAS user LU, you must release the device file for the user LU if the device file is already reserved as the copy destination of a file system. For more information about releasing and reserving a device file, see the
NAS Backup Restore User’s Guide
.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane ( Figure 14
or
2.
In the tree, double-click a port. Host groups or iSCSI targets corresponding to that port appear.
90
LUN Manager operations
3.
In the tree, select a host group or iSCSI target. The LU Path table displays information about LU paths associated with the selected host group or iSCSI target.
4.
In the LU Path table, select one or more LUNs to which volumes are assigned. (If a volume is assigned to a LUN, columns on the right of the LUN column are not empty.)
5.
Right-click the selection, and select Release LU Path. A confirmation message appears.
Figure 45 Information about LU paths to be deleted (Fibre Channel environments)
Figure 46 Information about LU paths to be deleted (iSCSI environments)
6.
Click OK. The selected LU path is removed from the table.
7.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
8.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array, and the specified LU paths are deleted.
NOTE:
If you delete numerous paths at one time, the deletion process might take time and the pane might seem to hang temporarily.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
91
Changing a host group’s name and host mode
NOTE:
• You cannot perform this operation on host groups for initiator ports.
• You cannot perform this operation on host groups for NAS ports.
CAUTION:
Before changing a host group’s host mode, HP recommends that you first back up data on the port the host group belongs to. The operation for changing the host mode should not be destructive, but data integrity cannot be guaranteed without a backup.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the tree, right-click the host group, and select Change Host Group. The Change Host Group dialog box appears.
Figure 47 Change Host Group dialog box
3.
To change the name of the host group, enter a new name in the Group Name box.
To change the host mode ( Table 16
), select the new host mode from the Host Mode list.
4.
If necessary, click Option, and select host mode options. For more information about host mode options, see
92
LUN Manager operations
Figure 48 Change Host Group dialog box (Option selected)
NOTE:
After you click Option, the pane expands to display a list of host mode options. The No.
column indicates option numbers. Select the check box for the option you want to specify.
5.
Click OK. Changes are indicated in blue in the table.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Changes to the host group name and host mode are applied to the array.
Changing an iSCSI target’s name and host mode
NOTE:
You cannot perform this operation on iSCSI targets for initiator ports.
CAUTION:
Before changing an iSCSI target’s host mode, HP recommends that you first back up data on the port the iSCSI target belongs to. The operation for setting the host mode should not be destructive, but data integrity cannot be guaranteed without a backup.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
) appears.
2.
In the tree, right-click the iSCSI target, and select Change iSCSI Target. The Change iSCSI Target pane appears.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
93
Figure 49 Change iSCSI Target pane
3.
To change the iSCSI target’s name, enter a new name in the Target name box.
To change the alias, enter a new alias in the Target alias box. iSCSI target aliases can include letters, numbers, periods (.), hyphens (-), and colons (:); but cannot include double-byte characters.
iSCSI target aliases are case-sensitive. An iSCSI target alias can consist of up to 32 characters
To change the host mode (see
), select the new host mode from the Host Mode list.
4.
If necessary, click Option, and select the host mode options. For more information about host mode options, see
Figure 50 Change iSCSI Target pane (Option selected)
NOTE:
After you click Option, the pane expands to display a list of host mode options. The No.
column indicates option numbers. Select the check box of the option you want to specify.
5.
Click OK. Changes are indicated in blue in the tree.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Changes to the iSCSI target name and host mode are applied to the array.
Deleting host groups
NOTE:
• You cannot perform this operation on host groups for NAS ports.
• You cannot delete host group 0 (zero). To remove all WWNs and LU paths from host group 0, you must initialize host group 0 (for more information, see
Initializing host group 0 (zero) ).
94 LUN Manager operations
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the tree, right-click the desired group, and select Delete Host Group. A confirmation message appears.
3.
Do either of the following:
• To delete all WWNs and the host group, click Yes.
• To delete the host group but not the WWNs in the host group, click No.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Deleting iSCSI targets
NOTE:
You cannot delete iSCSI target 0 (zero). To remove all iSCSI names and LU paths from iSCSI group 0, you must initialize iSCSI group 0 (for more information, see
Initializing iSCSI target 0 (zero)
).
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
) appears.
2.
In the tree, right-click the iSCSI target, and select Delete iSCSI Target. A confirmation message appears.
3.
Do either of the following:
• To delete all iSCSI names and the iSCSI target, click Yes.
• To delete the iSCSI target but not the iSCSI names in the iSCSI target, click No.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Initializing host group 0 (zero)
If you follow the procedure below, host group 0 (zero) is set to its initial state. This procedure removes all
WWNs from host group 0 and also removes all LU paths related to host group 0. This procedure also changes host group 0’s host mode to Standard and initializes the host group name. For example, if you initialize host group 0 for port CL1-A, host group 0’s name changes to 1A-G00.
NOTE:
You cannot perform this operation on host groups for NAS ports.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the tree, right-click host group 0, which is preceded by 00, and select Clear Host Group. A confirmation message appears.
3.
Click Yes.
Host group 0’s host mode and host group name change in the tree. WWNs are also removed from host group 0.
LU paths are removed from the table on the right of the tree. LUNs corresponding to the removed LU paths appear in blue.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
95
Initializing iSCSI target 0 (zero)
If you follow the procedure below, iSCSI target 0 (zero) is set to its initial state. This procedure removes all LU paths related to iSCSI target 0. This procedure also changes iSCSI target 0’s host mode to
Standard and initializes the iSCSI target name. After this procedure, the iSCSI target’s name changes to its default name.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the tree, right-click iSCSI target 0, which is preceded by 00, and select Clear Host Group. A confirmation message appears.
3.
Click YES.
iSCSI target 0’s host mode and host group name are changed in the tree. iSCSI names are also removed from iSCSI target 0.
LU paths are removed from the table on the right of the tree. LUNs corresponding to removed LU paths appear in blue.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Changes are applied to the array.
Changing a host bus adapter’s WWN and nickname
In Fibre Channel environments, you can identify host bus adapters by WWNs or nicknames.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the tree, double-click the Fibre folder. A list of Fibre Channel ports appears.
3.
In the tree, double-click the Fibre Channel port to which the host bus adapter is connected.
4.
In the tree, right-click a host bus adapter ( ), and select Change WWN & Nickname. The Change
WWN & Nickname dialog box appears.
Figure 51 Change WWN & Nickname dialog box
5.
To change the WWN, enter a new WWN or select another WWN from the WWN list.
To change the nickname, enter a new nickname In the Nickname box.
6.
If necessary, select Apply this change to other ports, too.
If this check box is selected, the change in the pane also affects other ports. For example, suppose that the same host bus adapter (that is, the same WWN) is located below ports CL1-A and CL2-A in the tree. If you select the host bus adapter (or WWN) from below one of the ports and change the nickname to hba1, the host bus adapter below the other port is also renamed to hba1.
96
LUN Manager operations
NOTE:
The change in the pane does not affect any port that satisfies one of the following conditions:
• The resulting nickname is already used as the nickname of a host bus adapter connected to the port.
• The resulting WWN exists in the port.
7.
Click OK. If a confirmation message appears, click OK. Changes appear in blue in the tree.
NOTE:
If you select Apply this change to other ports, too, and click OK, the Check WWNs dialog box appears and lists the host bus adapters to be changed. To make the changes, click
OK. If not, click Cancel.
Figure 52 Check WWNs dialog box
8.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
9.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Changing a host bus adapter’s iSCSI name and nickname
In iSCSI environments, host bus adapters can be identified by iSCSI names or nicknames.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
) appears.
2.
In the tree, double-click the iSCSI folder. A list of iSCSI ports appears.
3.
In the tree, right-click a host bus adapter ( ), and select Change iSCSI name & Nickname. The
Change iSCSI name & Nickname pane appears.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
97
Figure 53 Change iSCSI name & Nickname pane
4.
To change the iSCSI name, enter a new iSCSI name or select another iSCSI name in the iSCSI name list.
To change the nickname, enter a new nickname in the Nickname box.
5.
If necessary, select Apply this change to other ports, too.
If this check box is selected, the change in the pane also affects other ports. For example, suppose the same host bus adapter (that is, the same iSCSI name) is located below ports CL1-A and CL2-A in the tree. If you select the host bus adapter (or iSCSI name) from below one of the ports and change the nickname to hba1, the host bus adapter below the other port is also renamed to hba1.
NOTE:
The change in the pane does not affect any port that satisfies one of the following conditions:
• The resulting nickname is already used as the nickname of a host bus adapter connected to the iSCSI target.
• The resulting iSCSI name exists in the port.
6.
Click OK. If a confirmation message appears, click OK. Changes appear in blue in the tree.
NOTE:
If you select Apply this change to other ports, too and click OK, a pane appears ( Figure
54 ) listing the host bus adapters to be changed. To make changes, click OK. If not, click
Cancel.
98
LUN Manager operations
Figure 54 Check iSCSI names dialog box
7.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
8.
Click OK. Changes are applied to the array.
Deleting host bus adapters from host groups
NOTE:
You cannot perform this operation on host groups for NAS ports.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the tree, right-click a host bus adapter ( ), and select Delete WWN. A confirmation message appears.
3.
Click Yes.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Deleting host bus adapters from iSCSI targets
NOTE:
You cannot perform this operation on host groups for NAS ports.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
) appears.
2.
In the tree, right-click a host bus adapter ( ), and select Delete iSCSI Name. A confirmation message appears.
3.
Click YES.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
99
Deleting unneeded WWNs from the WWN name table
If you disconnect a host that was connected via a cable to the array, the host’s WWN remains in the
WWN name table on the LUN Manager pane.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the WWN name table, locate WWNs that are not registered in any host group. (If the Host Group column is blank, the WWN is not registered in any host group.) From these WWNs, right-click the
WWN you want to delete, and select Erase WWN.
3.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
4.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Deleting (initializing) unneeded iSCSI names
If you disconnect a host that was connected via a cable to the array, the host’s iSCSI name remains in the iSCSI name list on the LUN Manager pane.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the LU Path tree, right-click the iSCSI folder, and select Initialize iSCSI name.
NOTE:
If there are no unneeded iSCSI names, the shortcut menu does not appear.
3.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
4.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Viewing a list of concatenated parity groups
The array supports concatenation of parity groups. If parity groups are concatenated, a logical volume can be dispersed across the concatenated parity groups. Dispersal of logical volumes can provide faster access to data (particularly faster sequential access to data).
NOTE:
Only HP maintenance personnel can concatenate parity groups. If you have questions about concatenation of parity groups, contact you HP account support representative.
You can confirm whether a logical volume is dispersed across two or more parity groups. If the logical volume is dispersed across parity groups, a pane appears and displays a list of the parity groups.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
2.
In the LDEV table, right-click a logical volume (that is, an LDEV).
3.
Check to see if Concatenation List appears in the shortcut menu.
• If Concatenation List appears, the logical volume is dispersed across parity groups. Select
Concatenation List to view a list of the parity groups.
100
LUN Manager operations
Figure 55 Concatenation List pane
• If the Concatenation List command does not appear, the logical volume is not dispersed across parity groups.
Defining and viewing alternate paths
Use LUN Manager to define alternate paths. If an LU path fails, you can switch to its alternate path.
To create an alternate path, you must copy the original path from one port to another. For example, to define an alternative for the LU path from port CL1-A to logical volume 00:01, you must copy the LU path from port CL1-A to another port.
Copying paths from one Fibre Channel or iSCSI port to another
To use alternate paths, you must copy LU paths from one port to another.
CAUTION:
Before performing the following steps, see
for important information.
CAUTION:
To define alternate paths when LUN security is disabled, you must redefine the LU path.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
or
2.
In the tree, double-click the copy source port to display host groups or iSCSI targets below the port.
3.
To copy all LU paths defined to a host group, complete the following steps to copy the host group or iSCSI target:
a. In the tree, right-click the host group, and select Copy. The selected host group or iSCSI target turns green.
NOTE:
If you right-click a host group or iSCSI target for an initiator port, you cannot copy paths.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
101
b. Right-click the copy destination port, and select Paste. If a confirmation message appears, click OK.
NOTE:
You cannot paste paths to initiator port.
4.
To copy one or more (but not all) LU paths defined to a host group or iSCSI target, complete the following steps:
a. In the tree, select the host group or iSCSI target.
b. In the LU Path table, select one or more LUNs to which volumes are assigned. (If a volume is assigned to a LUN, columns on the right of the LUN column are not empty.)
c. Right-click the selection, and select Copy Paths. The selected LUNs turn green.
d. Double-click the copy destination port to display host groups or iSCSI targets below the port.
e. Right-click the host group to which you want to paste paths, and select Paste Paths. If a confirmation message appears, click OK.
NOTE:
You cannot paste paths to host groups or iSCSI targets for initiator ports.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Copying paths from one NAS port to another
CAUTION:
Before taking the following steps, see
for important information.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the LUN Manager pane (
2.
To specify the LU paths you want to copy:
a. In the tree, double-click a NAS port (copy source port), and select the User host group.
b. From the LU Path list, select one or more LUNs to which volumes are assigned. If a volume is assigned to a LUN, columns on the right of the LUN column are not empty.
c. Right-click the selection, and select Copy Paths. The selected LUNs turn green.
3.
To paste the LU paths:
a. In the tree, double-click the copy destination port (NAS port). The User host group appears below the port.
b. Right-click the User host group, and select Paste Paths.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Copying paths from a Fibre Channel or iSCSI port to a NAS port
CAUTION:
Before taking the following steps, see
for important information.
102
LUN Manager operations
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the LUN Manager pane (
or
2.
To specify the LU paths you want to copy:
a. In the tree, double-click a Fibre Channel or iSCSI port (copy source port), and select a host group or iSCSI target. The LU Path list displays information about LU paths.
b. In the list, select one or more LUNs to which volumes are assigned. If a volume is assigned to a
LUN, columns on the right of the LUN column are not empty.
c. Right-click the selection, and select Copy Paths. The selected LUNs turn green.
3.
To paste the LU paths:
a. In the tree, double-click a NAS port (copy destination port). The User host group appears below the port.
b. Right-click the User host group, and select Paste Paths.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Copying paths from a NAS port to a Fibre Channel or iSCSI port
CAUTION:
Before taking the following steps, see
for important information.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the LUN Manager pane (
or
2.
To specify the LU paths you want to copy:
a. In the tree, double-click a NAS port (copy source port), and select the User host group.
b. From the LU Path list, select one or more LUNs to which volumes are assigned. If a volume is assigned to a LUN, columns on the right of the LUN column are not empty.
c. Right-click the selection, and select Copy Paths. The selected LUNs turn green.
3.
To paste the LU paths:
a. Double-click the Fibre Channel or iSCSI port (copy destination port). Host groups or iSCSI targets appear below the port.
b. Right-click the host group or iSCSI target to which you want to paste paths, and select Paste
Paths. If a confirmation message appears, click OK.
NOTE:
You cannot paste paths to host groups or iSCSI targets for initiator ports.
4.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Viewing a list of alternate paths
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
or
2.
Do either of the following:
• In the LU Path list, right-click a LUN, and select Alternate Paths.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
103
NOTE:
If nothing appears in the table cells to the right of a LUN, no path is defined to the LU. Therefore, no alternative path is defined to the LU.
• In the LDEV table, right-click a logical volume (that is, an LDEV), and select Alternate Paths.
NOTE:
If nothing appears in the Paths column for a row in the LDEV list, no alternate paths are defined to the LDEV corresponding to that table row.
When you finish the operation, the Alternate Paths pane appears and displays a list of alternate paths. In the Alternate Paths pane, each table row indicates an alternate path.
Figure 56 Alternate Paths pane
NOTE:
The Group ID column indicates the host group’s group numbers (G-IDs).
Using LUN security
To protect mission-critical data in the array from illegal access, you must secure the logical volumes in the array. Use LUN Manager to secure LUs from illegal access by enabling LUN security on ports. For more information, see
.
By default, LUN security is disabled on each port. When configuring the system, you must enable
LUN security on ports.
104 LUN Manager operations
NOTE:
• You cannot apply LUN security to NAS ports.
• If a port has the External attribute, you cannot apply LUN security to the port.
Enabling LUN security
NOTE:
• You cannot apply LUN security to NAS ports.
• If a port has the External attribute, you cannot apply LUN security to the port.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
or
2.
In the tree, locate the port.
3.
See the text on the right of the port name to find the LUN security status.
• If LUN security is enabled, you do not need to perform the remaining steps.
• If LUN security is disabled, go to step 4.
4.
Right-click the port, and select LUN Security: Disable->Enable. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click Yes. A key is added to the port icon.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Changes in the security settings are applied to the array.
Disabling LUN security
CAUTION:
Do not disable LUN security on ports when host I/O is in progress.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane (
or
2.
In the tree, locate the port.
3.
See the text to the right of the port name to find the LUN security status.
• If LUN security is disabled, you do not need to perform the remaining steps.
• If LUN security is enabled, go to step 4.
4.
Right-click the port, and select LUN Security: Enable -> Disable. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click YES. The key is removed from the port icon.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Changes in the security settings are applied to the array.
NOTE:
If LUN security is disabled on a port, host groups corresponding to that port are grayed out in the tree (except for host group 0).
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
105
Configuring arrays for using RAID Manager XP commands
The system administrator can enter RAID Manager XP commands from open-system hosts to perform
Continuous Access XP and Business Copy XP operations on logical devices. For example, use RAID
Manager XP commands to create and split pairs. To enable the system administrator to enter RAID
Manager XP commands from open-system hosts, you must specify at least one logical device as the command device. If desired, you must also apply command device security to other logical devices in the array.
NOTE:
If an array is divided into SLPRs and you want to prevent RAID Manager XP commands from affecting multiple SLPRs, you must apply command device security to the logical volumes.
Specifying logical devices as command devices
To enable the system administrator to execute RAID Manager XP commands from an open-system host, you must select at least one logical device that will not be manipulated by Continuous Access XP or
Business Copy XP, and then specify the devices as the command devices. When a RAID Manager XP command is issued from a host, the command device receives the command. The command device transfers the command to another logical device. Then, the command performs a Continuous Access XP or Business Copy XP operation on that logical device.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane ( Figure 14
or
2.
In the LU Path or LDEV table, right-click the logical device.
NOTE:
• If nothing appears in the LU Path table, select a host group
• The
• The and icons indicate command devices.
icon does not indicate any logical device.
in the tree.
3.
Select Command Device: Disable->Enable. A confirmation message appears.
4.
Click Yes.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
NOTE:
If you do not want to use a device as a command device any longer, right-click the command device ( or ) in the LU Path or LDEV table, and select Command Device: Enable -> Disable.
Protecting logical devices from RAID Manager XP commands
To protect logical volumes from RAID Manager XP commands, you must apply command device security to the logical volumes. If command device security is applied to a logical device, the logical device is not affected by RAID Manager XP commands issued via command devices from hosts.
1.
Start LUN Manager. The LUN Manager pane ( Figure 14
or
2.
In the LU Path or LDEV table, right-click the command device.
106
LUN Manager operations
NOTE:
• If nothing appears in the LU Path table, select a host group ( ) in the tree.
• The applied.
icon indicates a logical volume to which command device security is already
• The icon does not indicate any logical device.
3.
Select Cmd. Dev. Security: Disable -> Enable. A confirmation message appears.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
NOTE:
To remove command device security from a logical device, right-click the logical device ( ) in the LU
Path or LDEV table, and select Cmd. Dev. Security: Enable -> Disable.
Defining remote command devices
A remote command device is a device in the array to which a command device in the external array is mapped.
As you send RAID Manager XP commands to the remote command device, these RAID Manager XP commands are sent to the external array’s command device to perform RAID Manager XP operations on the external array.
You can map a command device as a remote command device when one of the following arrays is connected as an external array:
• XP12000 Disk Array
• XP10000 Disk Array
• HP 200 Storage Virtualization System
• XP1024/XP128 Disk Array
• TagmaStore Universal Storage Platform subsystem
• TagmaStore Network Storage Controller subsystem
• TagmaStore Adaptable Modular Storage subsystem
• TagmaStore Workgroup Modular Storage subsystem
• Lightning 9900V series subsystem
• Thunder 9500V series subsystem
For more information about defining remote command devices, see the HP StorageWorks External
Storage XP user guide.
Configuring Fibre Channel ports
) to configure Fibre Channel ports in the array. You can also use this pane to modify the port configuration when the system is operating.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
107
NOTE:
You cannot configure Fibre Channel ports and perform operations related to NAS channel adapters at the same time. Therefore, when you perform operations on a NAS channel adapter first in the Port pane, you cannot configure Fibre Channel ports. Click Apply once to apply changes to the array, and then configure the Fibre Channel port.
Specifying Fibre Channel topologies
The term topology refers to how devices are connected to each other. For more information, see
.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 21 ).
2.
In the Package tree, select the Fibre folder or a Fibre Channel channel adapter.
• If you select the Fibre folder, the Port table displays a list of Fibre Channel ports in the array.
• If you select a channel adapter, the Port table displays a list of Fibre Channel ports on the channel adapter.
3.
In the Port table or Select a Port list, select a port. The Change Port Mode box displays information about the selected port.
4.
If you are using a fabric switch, select Enable in the Fabric list.
If you are not using a fabric switch, select Disable in the Fabric list.
5.
In the Connection list, select FC-AL or P-to-P.
NOTE:
If you are using a fabric switch, see the fabric switch’s documentation to check if the fabric switch requires the point-to-point topology. Some fabric switches require the point-to-point topology to get the system running. To specify the point-to-point topology, select P-to-P.
6.
Click Set. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the Port table, but not to the array. Changes are indicated in blue.
8.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
9.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Addressing Fibre Channel ports
When configuring a system, you must assign addresses to Fibre Channel ports. For more information, see
Fibre Channel port addresses .
NOTE:
For more information about Fibre Channel device addressing, see the array’s documentation.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 21 ).
2.
In the Package tree, select the Fibre folder or select a Fibre Channel channel adapter.
• If you select the Fibre folder, the Port table displays a list of Fibre Channel ports in the array.
• If you select a channel adapter, the Port table displays a list of Fibre Channel ports on the channel adapter.
3.
In the Port table or Select a Port list, select a port. The Change Port Mode box displays information about the selected port.
4.
In the Fibre Addr. list, select an address.
108
LUN Manager operations
5.
Click Set. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the Port table, but not to the array. Changes are indicated in blue.
7.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
8.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Specifying a Fibre Channel port’s data transfer speed
You can adjust the data transfer speed for Fibre Channel ports to optimize system performance. For more information, see
Data transfer speed for Fibre Channel ports .
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 21
).
2.
In the Package tree, select the Fibre folder or a Fibre Channel channel adapter.
• If you select the Fibre folder, the Port table displays a list of Fibre Channel ports in the array.
• If you select a channel adapter, the Port table displays a list of Fibre Channel ports on the channel adapter.
3.
In the Port table or Select a Port list, select a port. The Change Port Mode box displays information about the selected ports.
4.
In the Host Speed list, select the data transfer speed.
5.
Click Set. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the Port table, but not to the array. Changes are indicated in blue.
7.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
8.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Switching between Standard, High Speed, and Initiator/External MIX mode
Channel adapter boards (PCB: printed circuit board) take Standard, High Speed, or Initiator/External
MIX mode. You can apply High Speed mode to channel adapters to improve system performance. Or you can apply Initiator/External MIX mode so that one port can be used both as an initiator port for
Continuous Access XP or Continuous Access XP Journal and as an external port applied to a remote command device. Be aware that you can only apply High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode to channel adapters that satisfy certain requirements. For more information, see
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 21
).
2.
In the Package tree, double-click the Fibre folder. The tree displays a list of CHA (Fibre Channel channel adapter) packages.
3.
Double-click a channel adapter icon ( , , or ) to display port blocks.
• The
• The icon indicates a block of ports in Standard mode.
icon indicates a block of ports in High Speed mode.
• The icon indicates a block of ports in Initiator/External MIX mode.
4.
Do one of the following:
• To change the mode of a block of ports from Standard to High Speed or Initiator/External
MIX, right-click the icon, and select High Speed Mode/MIX Mode.
• To change the mode of a block of ports from High Speed to Standard, right-click the icon, and select Standard Mode.
• To change the mode of a block of ports from Initiator/External MIX mode to Standard, right-click the icon, and select Standard Mode.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
109
A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
NOTE:
Storage partition administrators cannot apply High Speed or Initiator/External MIX mode.
Making settings on iSCSI ports and iSNS servers
Use the Port pane (
Figure 22 ) to configure iSCSI ports in the array. You can also use this pane to make
settings on iSNS servers and modify settings when the system is operating.
Making settings on iSCSI ports
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 22
).
2.
In the Package tree, select the iSCSI folder. The Port table displays a list of iSCSI ports in the array.
NOTE:
If you specify a channel adapter in the Package tree, the Port table displays only ports in the specified channel adapter.
3.
In the Port table or Select a Port list, select an iSCSI port. The iSCSI port’s current configuration appears below the Select a Port list.
4.
To make settings on the iSCSI port, edit items below the list. For more information about the items, see
iSCSI port and iSNS server settings .
NOTE:
Use the vertical scroll bar to view all items.
5.
Click Set. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the Port table, but not to the array. Changes appear in blue.
7.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
8.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Making settings on iSNS servers
You can register iSCSI ports to the iSNS server by clicking Register or delete iSCSI ports from the iSNS server by clicking Delete.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 22
).
2.
In the iSCSI Function box, click Register or Delete. The Register Ports to iSNS Server or Delete
Ports from ISNS Server pane appears.
110
LUN Manager operations
Figure 57 Register Ports to iSNS Server pane
Figure 58 Delete Ports from iSNS Server pane
3.
From the iSCSI Ports list, select an iSCSI port. iSCSI port information appears in the Ports to be
Registered or Ports to iSNS Deleted list.
Use Add or Delete to move information between the lower and upper lists.
4.
Click OK. The Result of Registration to iSNS Server or Result of Deletion from iSNS Server pane appears. Information about the iSCSI port is removed from the iSNS server; the iSCSI port is unregistered from the iSNS server.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
111
Figure 59 Result of Registration to iSNS Server pane
Figure 60 Result of Deletion from iSNS Server pane
Checking the status of the connection between hosts and the array (iSCSI environments only)
In iSCSI environments, use LUN Manager to issue a ping command from an array port to a host. The ping command checks whether the host and array can communicate with each other. If the host responds to the ping command, the host and array can communicate with each other.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 22
).
2.
Click Ping below the Package tree. The Ping pane appears.
112
LUN Manager operations
Figure 61 Ping pane
3.
From the From (Subsystem Port) list, select an iSCSI port.
4.
In To (IP Address) box, enter the host’s IP address.
5.
Click OK.
A ping command is issued from the iSCSI port to the host five times. After the ping command is issued five times, the Ping Status pane appears and displays the results of the first to fifth attempts at issuing the ping command. The results appear in the order attempts were made.
Figure 62 Ping Status pane
6.
On the Ping Status pane, check the results of the ping command.
• If the host responded to the ping command, the Status column displays Success.
• If the host did not respond to the ping command, the Status column displays Error.
• The Success Rate field displays the ping command’s success rate. If the host responds to each of the five ping attempts, the success rate is 100 percent. If the host responds three times out of five ping attempts, the success rate is 60 percent.
7.
Click OK.
8.
To issue a ping command, return to step 3.
Otherwise, click Cancel.
TIP:
You can issue a ping command from an iSCSI port to an iSNS server. To verify connectivity between an iSNS server and the array, issue a ping command to the iSNS server. If the iSNS responds to the ping command, the iSNS server and array can communicate with each other.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
113
Setting user authentication (Fibre Channel environments)
When configuring Fibre Channel environments, use the Authentication pane (
and
) to set user authentication on host groups, Fibre Channel ports, and Fibre Channel switches of the array.
For an overview of user authentication, see
User authentication (Fibre Channel environments) .
NOTE:
The hosts to be connected must also be configured for authentication by host groups (and for authentication of host groups by the host, if required). For more information about configuring the host for CHAP authentication, see the documentation for the operating system and Fibre Channel driver in your environment.
Enabling and disabling authentication of hosts in host groups
You can specify whether to perform authentication of hosts on each host group. Switch the user authentication settings of host groups to enable or disable authentication of hosts. By default, user authentication is disabled.
To enable authentication of hosts on a host group:
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 31
).
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the Subsystem folder. If the array contains Fibre Channel adapters, the
Fibre folder appears below the Subsystem folder.
3.
Under the Fibre folder, double-click the Fibre folder and Fibre Channel port icon.
If you double-click the Fibre folder, Fibre Channel ports in the array appear as icons.
If you double-click a Fibre Channel port, host groups appear as icons. The host group name appears on the right of each icon. When appears, the host group performs authentication of hosts. When appears, the host group does not perform authentication of hosts. By default, all host group icons.
appears for
4.
Right-click a host group displayed with , and select Authentication : Disable -> Enable. The host groups icon changes to , and the port name appears in blue.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
To return the host group setting to , perform the same operation, except select Authentication : Enable
-> Disable in step 4.
Registering a host’s user information on a host group
On a host group that performs authentication of hosts, register the user information for all hosts you allow to connect.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 31
).
2.
In the Port tree, select the port or host group on which you want to register a host’s user information.
The user information for hosts currently registered on the selected port or host group appears in the
Authentication Information (Host) list.
You can register a host’s user information even if the port status is . In this case, however, the host’s registered user information is ignored.
114 LUN Manager operations
3.
Right-click any point in the Authentication Information (Host) list, and select Add New User
Information. The Add New User Information (Host) pane appears.
Figure 63 Add New User Information (Host) pane
Specify the following user information for the host you want to allow to connect:
• Group Name: Host bus adapter’s group name. Select one from the list. All group names of host bus adapters connected to the selected port by the cable appear in the list.
• User Name: Host bus adapter’s WWN, up to 16 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters in a user name.
• Secret: Secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between 12 to 32 characters.
You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols in a secret:
. - + @ _ = : / [ ] , ~
• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.
• Protocol: Protocol used in the user authentication. This protocol is fixed to CHAP.
4.
Click OK. The specified host user information appears in blue in the Authentication Information
(Host) list.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
NOTE:
You should register user information for all hosts to be connected to a host group that performs authentication of hosts. To allow a specific host to connect to such a host group without authentication, configure the host group and the host as follows.
• On the host:
It does not matter if you configure the host for authentication by ports with CHAP.
Changing a host’s user information (Fibre Channel environments)
You can change the host’s registered user name or secret, and switch authentication settings between
Enable and Disable after registration.
NOTE:
You cannot change the WWN when you change user information.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane (
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
115
2.
In the Port tree, expand the Fibre folder, and select a port or host group on which the user information you want to change is registered. All user information for hosts registered on the selected port or host group appears in the Authentication Information (Host) list.
3.
In the User Information (Host) list, right-click the user information item you want to change, and select
Change User Information. The Change User Information (Host) pane appears.
Figure 64 Change User Information (Host) pane
4.
Change the host’s user information.
You can change the User Name and Secret. For more information about available characters and length in the user name or secret, see
Registering a host's user information on a host group
.
5.
Click OK. The host’s user information appears in blue in the Authentication Information (Host) list.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Deleting a host’s user information (Fibre Channel environments)
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 31
).
2.
In the Port tree, expand the Fibre folder, and select the port or host group on which the user information you want to delete is registered. The user information for hosts currently registered on the selected port or host group appears in the Authentication Information (Host) list.
3.
In the Authentication Information (Host) list, right-click the user information item you want to delete, and select Delete User Information. The Delete Authentication Information pane appears.
116
LUN Manager operations
Figure 65 Delete Authentication Information pane
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Specifying a host group’s user information (when performing mutual authentication)
To perform mutual authentication, you must specify user information for host groups on array’s ports.
Specify unique user information for each host group. You can change the specified user information for host groups the same way you specified them initially.
1.
Start LUN Manager and display the Authentication pane (
).
2.
In the Port tree, select the port or host group whose user information you want to specify. Currently registered user information for the selected port or host group appears in the Authentication
Information (Target) list.
3.
Right-click any point in the Authentication Information (Target) list, and select Specify Authentication
Information. The Specify Authentication Information pane appears.
Figure 66 Specify Authentication Information pane
Specify the following user information for the port or host group selected in the Port tree:
• Port Name: Selected port’s port name. You cannot change the port name.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
117
• User Name: Host group’s user name, up to 16 characters. You can use specified alphanumeric characters. User names are case-sensitive.
• Secret: Secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between 12 to 32 characters.
You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols in a secret:
. - + @ _ = : / [ ] , ~
• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.
4.
Click OK. The specified user information for the port appears in blue in the Authentication
Information (Target) list.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Clearing a host group’s user information (when performing mutual authentication)
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 31
).
2.
In the Port tree, expand the Fibre folder, and select the port or host group whose user information you want to clear. The currently registered user information for the port or host group appears in the Authentication Information (Target) list.
3.
Right-click any point in the Authentication Information (Target) list, and select Clear Authentication information. The Clear Authentication Information pane appears.
4.
Click OK. The selected host group’s user information disappears from the Authentication Information
(Target) list.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Settings and connection results in authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments)
During authentication of hosts, the connection result is determined based on the combination of the following host group settings:
• Host group’s setting in the Port tree: enable ( ) or disable ( )
• Whether or not the user information for the host that attempts to connect is registered on the host group
shows the relationship between combinations of host group settings and connection results in authentication of hosts. Regardless of whether or not the host is configured for authentication by ports with CHAP, the connection results are as follows, unless otherwise noted.
118
LUN Manager operations
Table 18 Combinations of port settings and connection results (Fibre Channel environments)
Port settings Host settings
Connection results
Authentication: at host group
Host’s user information
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Registered
Registered
Not registered
— 1
Registered
Not registered
Registered
— 1
Connected if the authentication of the host succeeded
Failed to be authenticated and cannot be connected
Failed to be authenticated and cannot be connected
Connected without authentication of the host 2
1
2
This item does not affect the connection results, or cannot be specified.
If a host is configured for authentication by ports with CHAP, authentication of the host fails. To allow such a host to connect to the port without authentication, do not configure it for authentication by ports with CHAP.
For more information about authentication of hosts, see
Authentication of hosts (Fibre Channel environments)
.
Settings and connection results in authentication of Fibre Channel switches
During authentication of hosts, the connection result is determined based on the combination of the following port settings:
• Port’s setting in the Port tree: enable ( ) or disable ( )
• Whether or not the user information for the Fibre Channel switch that attempts to connect is registered on the port
shows the relationship between combinations of port settings and connection results in authentication of Fibre Channel switches. Regardless of whether or not the host is configured for authentication by Fibre Channel switches with CHAP, the connection results are as follows, unless otherwise noted.
Table 19 Combinations of Fibre Channel settings and connection results
Port settings
Authentication: at Fibre Channel switch
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Fibre Channel switch’s user information
Registered
Registered
Not registered
— 1
Fibre Channel switch settings
Registered
Not registered
Registered
— 1
Connection results
Connected if the authentication of the Fibre Channel switch succeeded
Failed to be authenticated and cannot be connected
Failed to be authenticated and cannot be connected
Connected without authentication of the Fibre Channel switch 2
1
2
This item does not affect the connection results, or cannot be specified.
If a Fibre Channel switch is configured for authentication by ports with CHAP, authentication of the host fails. To allow such a
Fibre Channel switch to connect to the port without authentication, do not configure it for authentication by ports with CHAP.
For more information about authentication of hosts, see
Authentication of Fibre Channel switches .
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
119
Specifying a Fibre Channel port’s information
To perform user authentication in Fibre Channel environments, you must specify information for the Fibre
Channel ports of the array.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 30 ).
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the Subsystem folder. If the array contains Fibre Channel adapters, the Fibre folder appears below the Subsystem folder. The port’s information appears in the Port
Information list.
3.
Right-click any point in the Port Information list, and select Port Information. The Set Port Information pane appears.
Figure 67 Set Port Information pane
Specify the following port information:
• Time out: Time period starting when authentication fails and ending when the next authentication session ends. This time period is between 15 to 60 seconds. The initial value is 45 seconds.
• Refusal Interval: Interval beginning when the connection to a port fails and ending when the next authentication session starts, up to 60 minutes. The initial value is 3 minutes.
• Refusal Frequency: Number of times authentication for connection to a port is allowed, up to 10 times. The initial value is 3 times.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Registering a Fibre Channel port’s user information
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane (
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the Subsystem folder. If the array contains Fibre Channel adapters, the
Fibre folder appears below the Subsystem folder.
3.
In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the port appears in the tree.
4.
Right-click any port icon in the Port tree, and select Default Setting(User Name / Secret). The Default
Setting(User Name/Secret) pane appears.
120
LUN Manager operations
Figure 68 Default Setting(User Name/Secret) pane
Specify the following user information:
• User Name: Fiber Channel’s user name, up to 16 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters in a user name. User names are case-sensitive.
• Secret: Secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between 12 to 32 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters.
• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Registering a Fibre Channel switch’s user information
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane (
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the Subsystem folder. If the array contains Fibre Channel adapters, the
Fibre folder appears below the Subsystem folder.
3.
In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the Fibre Channel switch appears in the FC Switch Information list.
4.
Right-click any point in the FC Switch Information list, and select Specify User Information. The
Specify Authentication Information pane appears.
Figure 69 Specify Authentication Information pane
Specify the following user information for the host you want to allow to connect:
• User Name: Fibre Channel switch’s user name, up to 16 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters in a user name.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
121
• Secret: Secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between 12 to 32 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters.
• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret, again, for confirmation.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Clearing a Fibre Channel switch’s user information
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 30 ).
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the Subsystem folder. If the array contains Fibre Channel adapters, the
Fibre folder appears below the Subsystem folder.
3.
In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the Fibre Channel switch appears in the FC Switch Information list.
4.
Right-click any point in the FC Switch Information list, and select Clear User information. The Clear
Authentication Information pane appears.
Figure 70 Clear Authentication Information pane
5.
Click OK.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Specifying a Fibre Channel switch’s authentication mode
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 30 ).
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the Subsystem folder. If the array contains Fibre Channel adapters, the
Fibre folder appears below the Subsystem folder.
3.
In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the Fibre Channel switch appears in the FC Switch Information list.
4.
Right-click any point in the FC Switch Information list, and select Authentication unidirectional->bi-directional.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
122
LUN Manager operations
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
To return the Fibre Channel setting, perform the same operation, except select Authentication bi-directional->unidirectional in step 4.
Specifying whether a Fibre Channel switch can perform authentication
To enable Fibre Channel switches to authenticate hosts, you must enable the Fibre Channel switch’s user authentication settings. By default, Fibre Channel switch authentication is disabled.
To enable a Fibre Channel switch to authenticate hosts:
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane (
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the Subsystem folder. If the array contains Fibre Channel adapters, the
Fibre folder appears below the Subsystem folder.
3.
In the Port tree, double-click the Fibre folder. Information about the Fibre Channel switch appears in the FC Switch Information list.
4.
Right-click any point in the FC Switch Information list, and select Authentication Disable->Enable.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
To return the Fibre Channel switch setting so the switch cannot authenticate hosts, perform the same operation, except select Authentication Enable->Disable in step 4.
Setting user authentication (iSCSI environments)
When configuring iSCSI environments, use the Authentication pane ( Figure 30
) to set user authentication on iSCSI targets of the array. First, specify whether or not each iSCSI target performs authentication of hosts, and then register the hosts’ user information on the iSCSI targets that perform authentication.
According to this setting, iSCSI targets can authenticate hosts that request a connection and restrict the connections. In addition, to implement mutual authentication, specify the iSCSI targets’ user information on each iSCSI target of the array.
This section describes the iSCSI target setting operations for user authentication.
For an overview of user authentication, see
User authentication (iSCSI environments)
.
NOTE:
The hosts to be connected must also be configured for authentication by iSCSI targets (and for authentication of iSCSI targets by the host, if required). For more information about configuring the host for CHAP authentication, see the documentation for the operating system and iSCSI driver in your environment.
Enabling and disabling authentication of hosts on iSCSI targets
You can specify whether to perform authentication of hosts on each iSCSI target. Switch the user authentication settings of iSCSI targets to enable or disable authentication of hosts. By default, user authentication is disabled.
To enable authentication of hosts on an iSCSI target:
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane (
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the Subsystem folder. If the array contains iSCSI channel adapters, the iSCSI folder appears below the Subsystem folder.
3.
Under the iSCSI folder, double-click the iSCSI folder or iSCSI port icon.
If you double-click the iSCSI folder, iSCSI ports in the array appear as icons.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
123
If you double-click an iSCSI port, iSCSI target appears as an icon. The iSCSI name appears on the right of each icon. When appears, the iSCSI target performs authentication of hosts. When appears, the iSCSI target does not perform authentication of hosts. By default, for all iSCSI targets.
appears
4.
Right-click an iSCSI target displayed with , and select Authentication Disable -> Enable. The iSCSI target’s icon changes to , and the port name appears in blue.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
To return the iSCSI target setting to , perform the same operation, except select Authentication Enable
-> Disable in step 4.
Registering a host’s user information on an iSCSI target
On an iSCSI target that performs authentication of hosts, register the user information for all hosts that you allow to connect.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 30 ).
2.
In the Port tree, select the port or iSCSI target on which you want to register a host’s user information.
The user information for hosts currently registered on the selected port or iSCSI target appears in the Authentication information (Target) list.
You can register a host’s user information even if the port status is . In this case, however, the host’s registered user information is ignored.
3.
Right-click any point in the Authentication information (Host) list, and select Add New User
Information (Host). The Add New User Information (Host) pane appears.
124 LUN Manager operations
Figure 71 Add New User Information (Host) pane
NOTE:
You should register user information for all hosts to be connected to an iSCSI target that performs authentication of hosts. To allow a specific host to connect to such an iSCSI target without authentication, configure the iSCSI target and the host as follows:
• On the host:
It does not matter whether or not you configure the host for authentication by ports with
CHAP.
However, if the host uses Microsoft iSCSI Initiator, do not configure the host for authentication by ports with CHAP.
Specify the following user information for the host you want to allow to connect:
• Target Name: Host bus adapter’s iSCSI name. Select one from the list or enter the name directly. In the list, all iSCSI names of host bus adapters connected to the selected port by the cable appear. For more information about the characters and length you can specify as an iSCSI name, see
iSCSI port and iSNS server settings
.
• User Name: Host’s user name of the host up to 128 characters.
You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols in a user name:
. - + @ _ = : / [ ] , ~
User names are case-sensitive. For example, host1 and Host1 represent different users.
• Secret: Secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between 12 to 32 characters.
You can use the same characters and symbols as a user name in a secret.
• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret again for confirmation.
• Protocol: Protocol used in user authentication. This protocol is fixed to CHAP.
4.
Click OK. The host’s specified user information appears in blue in the Authentication Information
(Host) list.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Changing a host’s user information
You can change a host’s registered user name or secret and switch authentication settings between
Enable and Disable after registration.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
125
NOTE:
You cannot change iSCSI names when you change user information.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 30 ).
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the iSCSI folder, and select the port or iSCSI target on which the user information you want to change is registered. All user information for hosts registered on the selected port appears in the Authentication information (Host) list.
3.
In the Authentication information (Host) list, right-click the user information item you want to change, and select Change User Information (Host). The Change User Information (Host) pane appears.
Figure 72 Change User Information (Host) pane
4.
Change the host’s user information.
You can change the specifications of User Name and Secret. For more information about available characters and length in the user name or secret, see
Registering a host's user information on an iSCSI target
.
5.
Click OK. The host’s user information appears in blue in the Authentication information (Host) list.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Deleting a host’s user information (iSCSI environments)
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 30 ).
2.
In the Port tree, double-click the iSCSI folder, and select the port or iSCSI target on which the user information you want to delete is registered. The user information of hosts currently registered on the selected port or iSCSI target appears in the Authentication information (Host) list.
3.
In the Authentication information (Host) list, right-click the user information item you want to delete, and select Delete User Information (Host). The Delete Authentication Information pane appears.
126
LUN Manager operations
Figure 73 Delete Authentication Information pane
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Specifying an iSCSI target’s user information (when performing mutual authentication)
To perform mutual authentication, you must specify user information for iSCSI targets on the array’s ports.
Specify unique user information for each iSCSI target. You can change the specified user information for iSCSI targets the same way you specified them initially.
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane (
2.
In the Port tree, select the port or iSCSI target whose user information you want to specify.
The currently registered user information for the selected port or iSCSI target appears in the
Authentication information (Target) list.
3.
Right-click any point in the Authentication information (Target) list, and select Specify Authentication
Information. The Specify Authentication Information pane appears.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
127
Figure 74 Specify Authentication Information pane
Specify the following user information for the port or iSCSI target selected in the Port tree:
• Target Name: Selected port’s iSCSI name. You cannot change the iSCSI name.
• User Name: iSCSI target’s user name up to 128 characters. You can use alphanumeric characters, spaces, and the following symbols in a user name:
. - + @ _ = : / [ ] , ~
User names are case-sensitive. For example, port1 and Port1 represent different user names.
• Secret: Secret (that is, a password used in CHAP authentication) between 12 to 32 characters. You can use the same characters and symbols as a user name.
• Re-enter Secret: Specify the secret again for confirmation.
4.
Click OK. The specified user information for the port appears in blue in the Authentication information (Target) list.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Clearing an iSCSI target’s user information (when performing mutual authentication)
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Authentication pane ( Figure 30 ).
2.
In the Port tree, expand the iSCSI folder, and select the port or iSCSI target whose user information you want to clear. The currently registered user information for the port or iSCSI target appears in the
Authentication Information (Target) list on the right of the tree.
3.
Right-click any point in the Authentication information (Target) list, and select Clear Authentication
Information. The Clear Authentication Information pane appears.
4.
Click OK. The selected iSCSI target’s user information disappears from the Authentication information
(Target) list.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
6.
Click OK. Settings are applied to the array.
Settings and connection results in authentication of hosts (iSCSI environments)
During authentication of hosts, the connection result is determined based on the combination of the following iSCSI target settings:
• iSCSI target’s setting in the Port tree: enable ( ) or disable ( )
128
LUN Manager operations
• Whether or not the user information for the host that attempts to connect is registered on the iSCSI target
shows the relationship between combinations of iSCSI target settings and connection results in authentication of hosts. Regardless of whether or not the host is configured for authentication by ports with CHAP, the connection results are as follows, unless otherwise noted.
Table 20 Combinations of port settings and connection results (iSCSI environments)
Port settings
Authentication: at target
Enable
Host user information
Registered
Host settings Connection results
Enable
Enable
Disable
Registered
Not registered
— 2
Registered
Not registered
Registered
— 2
Connected if the authentication of the host succeeded 1
Failed to be authenticated and cannot be connected
Failed to be authenticated and cannot be connected
Connected without authentication of the host 3
1
2
3
If a host is not configured for authentication by ports with CHAP, the host cannot connect to the array.
This item does not affect the connection results, or cannot be specified.
If a host uses Microsoft iSCSI Initiator and is configured for authentication by ports with CHAP, authentication of the host fails.
To allow such a host to connect to the port without authentication, do not configure it for authentication by ports with CHAP.
For more information about authentication of hosts, see
User authentication (iSCSI environments) .
Operating NAS channel adapters
You can use LUN Manager to check the running status of OSs on NAS channel adapters. Also, when a failure occurs on the OS, you can operate (restart, stop, or start) the OS using LUN Manager without going to the array’s cabinet.
NOTE:
You cannot perform operations related to NAS channel adapters and set Fibre Channel ports at the same time. Therefore, if you change a Fibre Channel port setting first in the Port pane, you cannot operate the NAS channel adapter. Click Apply once to apply the change to the array, and then operate the
NAS channel adapter’s OS.
Restarting a NAS channel adapter’s OS
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 23
).
2.
In the Package tree, select the NAS folder or a NAS channel adapter.
• If you select the NAS folder, the CHN list displays the NAS channel adapters in the array.
• If you select a channel adapter, the CHN list displays information about that channel adapter.
3.
In the CHN list, select the channel adapter whose OS Status column contains UP. The Reboot and
Shut Down buttons are activated.
4.
Click Reboot. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. The row selected in the CHN list appears in blue and the operation (Reboot) appears in the
Setting column. Also, the channel adapter name to be operated appears in blue in the Package tree.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. The selected NAS channel adapter’s OS restarts.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
129
When the reboot starts, BUSY (Shutdown) appears in the OS Status column. If the OS restarted,
UP appears.
NOTE:
You can stop the OS by right-clicking the channel adapter in the Package list and selecting Reboot instead of using the Reboot button.
Stopping a NAS channel adapter’s OS
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 23
).
2.
In the Package tree, select the NAS folder or a NAS channel adapter.
• If you select the NAS folder, the CHN list displays the NAS channel adapters in the array.
• If you select a channel adapter, the CHN list displays information about that channel adapter.
3.
In the CHN list, select the channel adapter whose OS Status column contains UP. The Reboot and
Shut Down buttons are activated.
4.
Click Shut Down. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. The row selected in the CHN list appears in blue and the operation (Shut Down) appears in the Setting column. Also, the channel adapter name to be stopped appears in blue in the
Package tree.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. The selected NAS channel adapter’s OS stops.
During stop processing, BUSY (Shutdown) appears in OS Status column. If the OS stops, DOWN appears.
NOTE:
You can stop the OS by right-clicking the channel adapter in the Package list and selecting Shut Down instead of using the Shut Down button.
Starting a NAS channel adapter’s OS
1.
Start LUN Manager, and display the Port pane ( Figure 23
).
2.
In the Package tree, select the NAS folder or a NAS channel adapter.
• If you select the NAS folder, the CHN list displays the NAS channel adapters in the array.
• If you select a channel adapter, the CHN list displays information about that channel adapter.
3.
In the CHN list, select the channel adapter whose OS Status column contains DOWN or DOWN
(Failure). The Boot button is activated.
4.
Click Boot. A confirmation message appears.
5.
Click OK. The row selected in the CHN list appears in blue and the operation (Boot) appears in the
Setting column. Also, the channel adapter name to be started appears in blue in the Package tree.
6.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
7.
Click OK. The selected NAS channel adapter’s OS starts.
During start processing, BUSY (Boot) appears in the OS Status column. If the OS starts, UP appears.
130
LUN Manager operations
NOTE:
You can start the OS by right-clicking the channel adapter in the Package list and selecting Boot instead of using the Boot button.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
131
132
LUN Manager operations
5 Troubleshooting LUN Manager
Troubleshooting
For troubleshooting information on the array, see the array’s documentation.
You are responsible for the operation and normal maintenance of the Command View XP computer or XP
Remote Web Console. The following are some guidelines for troubleshooting the Command View XP computer or XP Remote Web Console:
• Check the cabling and LAN: Verify that both the computer and LAN cabling are firmly attached, and the LAN is operating properly.
• Reboot the computer: Close any programs that are not responding. If necessary, reboot the computer and restart the Command View XP Java applet program.
• Check for any general error conditions:
describes general error conditions and the recommended resolution for each item. If you still cannot resolve an error condition, call you HP account support representative for assistance (see
Contacting you HP account support representative
for contact information).
• Check the status lamp on the Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console main pane: If the color of the lamp is yellow ( ) or red ( ), confirm the severity level of the DKC and DKU on the
Status pane (see the HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the
HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200). If you cannot resolve an error condition, contact you HP account support representative.
• Download the Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console trace files using the FD Dump
Tool: If you cannot resolve an error condition, copy the Command View XP or XP Remote
Web Console configuration information onto floppy disks using the FD Dump Tool (see the
HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP
Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200). Contact your HP account support representative (see
Contacting you HP account support representative
), and give the information on the floppy disks to the HP personnel.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
133
Table 21 Troubleshooting LUN Manager
Error Condition
The program on the SVP is updated.
The Command View XP computer experiences an error.
A network error occurred.
Only the Exit and Refresh buttons are effective when accessing the SVP from the Command View XP computer.
After dragging and dropping objects to another location or area, the scroll bar on that location is unusable.
A focus disappears from the edit box.
A Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console pane is closed by one of the following:
• Clicking the button on the pane.
• Using commands such as File and Exit on the
Web browser.
• Pressing the Alt and F4 keys.
An internal error occurred, or a Web browser ended abnormally (forcibly).
If you cannot resolve an error condition.
Recommended Action
Exit all Web browsers on the Command View XP computer, and restart the browsers. If in doubt, exit and restart the browsers.
Save the Java log file on the Command View XP computer, and report to your HP account support representative.
For Windows 2000, the Java log file is in the following place: c:\Documents and Settings\login user
ID\plugin131.trace
Restart the Command View XP computer.
Restart the Command View XP computer.
The SVP might not be ready or might be performing write processes from another system. Wait for a while, and click the Refresh button.
Close all panes, including the Storage Device List pane, and log on to Command View XP or XP Remote
Web Console again.
Close all panes, including the Storage Device List pane, and log on to Command View XP or XP Remote
Web Console again.
Wait for an RMI time-out (default is 1 minute), and restart Command View XP or XP Remote Web
Console.
Close all panes, including the Storage Device List pane, and log on to Command View XP or XP Remote
Web Console again. If the same error occurs, restart the Command View XP computer.
Copy the Command View XP or XP Remote Web
Console configuration information onto floppy disks using the FD Dump Tool (see the HP StorageWorks
Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user
guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200), and contact your HP account support representative.
Contacting you HP account support representative
If you need to contact your HP account support representative, be sure to provide as much information about the problem as possible, including the circumstances surrounding the error or failure, exact content of messages displayed on the Command View XP computer, and severity levels and reference codes of the R-SIMs on the R-SIM pane.
134
Troubleshooting LUN Manager
6 Finding an open-system host’s
World Wide Name (WWN)
If you are configuring a Fibre Channel environment, you must verify that the fibre adapters and Fibre
Channel device drivers are installed on the open-system hosts. Next, you must find the World Wide
Name (WWN) of the host bus adapter used in each open-system host. The WWN is a unique identifier for a host bus adapter in a open-system host, consisting of 16 hexadecimal digits.
This chapter describes how to find a host’s WWN. HP recommends that you make a record of WWNs of the hosts in your system, because you will need to enter WWNs in LUN Manager panes to specify the hosts used in your system.
Finding WWNs in Windows NT or Windows 2000 environments
HP currently supports the Emulex Fibre Channel adapter in Windows NT or Windows 2000 environments, and will support other adapters in the future. For more information about Fibre Channel adapter support, or if you are using a Fibre Channel adapter other than Emulex, contact you HP account support representative for instructions on finding the WWN.
NOTE:
Although these instructions are written for a Windows NT environment, similar instructions apply in a
Windows 2000 environment.
1.
Verify that the fibre adapters and the Fibre Channel device drivers are installed.
2.
Log in to the Windows NT or Windows 2000 host with administrator access.
3.
Go to the LightPulse™ Utility to open the LightPulse Utility/NT pane.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
135
Figure 75 LightPulse Utility/NT pane
If you do not have a shortcut to the Utility, do the following:
a. Go to the Start menu, select Find, and choose Files and Folders. The Find pane opens.
b. In the Named field, enter lputilnt.exe.
In the Look in box, choose the hard drive containing the Emulex mini-port driver.
c. Click Find Now to search for the LightPulse Utility.
NOTE:
If you cannot find the LightPulse Utility, contact Emulex technical support.
d. In the Find: Files named list box, select lputilnt.exe, and press Enter. The LightPulse Utility/NT pane appears.
4.
In the list on the left of the pane, verify that the installed adapters appear.
5.
In the Category list, select Configuration Data. In the Region list, select 16 World-Wide Name. The selected adapter’s WWN appears in the list on the right of the pane.
Finding WWNs in Sun Solaris environments
HP currently supports the JNI Fibre Channel adapter in Sun Solaris environments. This information will be updated as needed to cover future adapter-specific information as those adapters are supported. For more information about Fibre Channel adapter support, or if you are using a Fibre Channel adapter other than JNI, contact you HP account support representative for instructions for finding the WWN.
1.
Verify that the fibre adapters and Fibre Channel device drivers are installed.
2.
Login to the Sun Solaris host with root access.
3.
Enter dmesg |grep Fibre. A list of installed Fibre Channel devices and their WWNs appears.
# dmesg |grep Fibre
: fcaw1: JNI Fibre Channel Adapter model FCW fcaw1: Fibre Channel WWN: 200000e0694011a4 fcaw2: JNI Fibre Channel Adapter model FCW fcaw2: Fibre Channel WWN: 200000e06940121e
← Enter the dmesg command.
← Record the WWN.
← Record the WWN.
136
Finding an open-system host’s World Wide Name (WWN)
#
4.
Verify that the listed Fibre Channel adapters are correct, and record the listed WWNs.
Finding WWNs in AIX, SGI Irix, or Sequent environments
To find WWNs in AIX, SGI Irix, or Sequent environments, use the fibre switch connected to the host. The method for finding the WWN of the connected server on each port using the fibre switch depends on the type of switch. For instructions on finding the WWN, see the fibre switch’s documentation.
Finding WWNs in HP-UX environments
1.
Verify that the fibre adapters and Fibre Channel device drivers are installed.
2.
Log in to the HP-UX host with root access.
3.
At the command line prompt, enter:
/usr/sbin/ioscan -fnC lan
4.
A list of attached Fibre Channel devices and their device file names appears.
# /usr/sbin/ioscan -fnC lan
Class
======================================================================== lan
I H/W Path Driver
0 8/0.5
← Enter the ioscan command.
S/W State fcT1_cntl CLAIMED
H/W Type
INTERFACE
Description
HP Fibre Channel
Mass Storage Cntl lan 4 8/4.5
/dev/fcms0 ← Device file name.
fcT1_cntl CLAIMED INTERFACE HP Fibre Channel
Mass Storage Cntl lan 5 8/8.5
/dev/fcms4 ← Device file name.
fcT1_cntl CLAIMED INTERFACE HP Fibre Channel
Mass Storage Cntl
/dev/fcms5 ← Device file name.
fcT1_cntl CLAIMED INTERFACE lan lan lan
6 8/12.5
HP Fibre Channel
Mass Storage Cntl
/dev/fcms6 ← Device file name.
1 10/8/1/0 btlan4
2 10/8/2/0 btlan4
CLAIMED
CLAIMED
INTERFACE
INTERFACE
PCI(10110009) --
Built-in #1
PCI(10110009) --
Built-in #2
Built-in LAN
/dev/lan3 lan 3 10/12/6 lan2 CLAIMED INTERFACE
/dev/diag/lan3 /dev/ether3
# # fcmsutil /dev/fcms0
Local N_Port_ID is = 0x000001
← Enter the fcmsutil command.
N_Port Node World Wide Name = 0x10000060B0C08294
N_Port Port World Wide Name = 0x10000060B0C08294 ← Record the WWN.
Topology = IN_LOOP
Speed = 1062500000 (bps)
HPA of card = 0xFFB40000
EIM of card = 0xFFFA000D
Driver state = READY
Number of EDB’s in use = 0
Number of OIB’s in use = 0
Number of Active Outbound Exchanges = 1
Number of Active Login Sessions = 2
#
Record the Fibre Channel device file name (for example, /dev/fcms0).
5.
Use the fcmsutil command with the Fibre Channel device name to list the WWN for that
Fibre Channel device. For example, to list the WWN for the device with the device file name
/dev/fcms0, enter:
/opt/fcms/bin/fcmsutil /dev/fcms0
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
137
NOTE:
When an A5158 Fibre Channel adapter is used, enter the following for the device name at the command line prompt:
/usr/sbin/ioscan -fnC fc
6.
Record the Fibre Channel device file name (for example, /dev/td0).
NOTE:
When the A5158 Fibre Channel adapter is used, enter the following to list the WWN for the device with the device file name:
/opt/fcms/bin/fcmsutil <device file name>
7.
Record the WWN and repeat the above steps for each Fibre Channel device you want to use.
138
Finding an open-system host’s World Wide Name (WWN)
7 Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size (CVS) are functions for open systems and mainframe systems.
To use these functions, you need the software called HP StorageWorks LUN Configuration and Security
Manager XP.
This chapter describes Volume Manager and CVS.
Overview of Volume Manager
This section describes the Volume Manager function and configuration of LUSE volumes (expanded LUs).
Volume Manager operations include the following:
• Viewing concatenated parity groups
Volume Manager function
The Volume Manager function is applied to open-system logical volumes and enables you to configure one large logical volume by combining several small LDEVs. The Volume Manager function allows hosts that can only use a limited number of logical units (LUs) per fibre interface to access larger amounts of data using expanded LUs.
shows the LUSE configuration. By using the Volume Manager function, you can combine several logical devices (LDEVs) or volumes into one large logical volume. The configured LDEV’s size can be expanded up to 36 times the size of the original LDEV. The ID of the logical volume defined as the large logical volume is represented by the smallest LDEV ID (assigned to the top LDEV). The host recognizes the expanded logical volume as one representative LDEV. As long as the number of LDEVs combined into one large logical volume does not exceed the specified limit (see
), you can arbitrarily select any LDEVs as the volumes to combine, regardless of their size (or capacity) or whether or not they are on the same Control Unit (CU). The Volume Manager function also allows you to combine several LDEVs and a LUSE volume (combined LDEVs) into one LUSE volume, or combine LUSE volumes together into one LUSE volume.
Before the host can access each LDEV composing an expanded LU (LUSE volume), you must release the expanded LU.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
139
Figure 76 LUSE configuration
If you want to create an open-systems volume (LU) larger than 2 TB, you must use LUSE to combine open-systems volumes so that a LUSE volume larger than 2 TB is created. Whether hosts can access a volume larger than 2 TB depends on the operating system of the hosts and the host mode option of LUN
Manager. For detailed information, please refer to the HP StorageWorks LUN Manager User’s Guide.
Volume Manager guidelines
The following are the specifications and restrictions on LDEVs used to configure a LUSE volume:
• Open volumes (OPEN-3, OPEN-8, OPEN-9, OPEN-E, OPEN-L, and OPEN-V) are supported.
• The number of LDEVs combined into a LUSE volume must be within the range of 2 to 36.
NOTE:
The number of expanded LUs (LDEVs) should not exceed 36, even if the LUSE volume contains another LUSE volume.
• The emulation type of LDEVs combined into a LUSE volume must be the same.
• The RAID level of LDEVs that are to be combined into LUSE volumes should be the same.
(Recommended).
NOTE:
Combining RAID-1 and RAID-5 volumes into the same LUSE volume is supported, but not recommended.
• LDEVs or LUSE volumes to be combined must not have assigned path definitions. For this reason,
TrueCopy for z/OS®, Continuous Access XP, ShadowImage for z/OS, Business Copy XP, and
Continuous Access XP Journal pair volumes cannot be targets of Volume Manager operations
(see
Volume Manager operations using a path-defined LDEV ).
• LDEVs to be combined into LUSE volumes must not be reserved for Auto LUN XP.
• When combining a LUSE volume with another LUSE volume, the range of LDEVs should not overlap.
140
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
NOTE:
If you combine LDEV00, LDEV03, and LDEV05 into LUSE 1, combine LDEV02 and LDEV04 into
LUSE 2,and combine LDEV06 and LDEV07 into LUSE 3, you can also combine LUSE 1 and LUSE 3.
However, you cannot combine LUSE 1 and LUSE 2, because the LDEV range in LUSE 1 and LUSE 2 overlap.
• The maximum capacity of a LUSE volume is 60 TB.
NOTE:
When a host accesses a LUSE volume, the host can only access less than 2 TB of the LUSE volume’s address area.
NOTE:
Any LUSE volume contains up to 4 MB of disk area to be used for controlling the volume, and this disk area cannot contain user data. Therefore, the maximum capacity for user data in a LUSE volume is slightly less than 60 TB.
• Combining command devices and Just In Time volumes into a LUSE volume is not supported.
• The access attribute must be set to Read/Write.
• Combining internal LUs, external LUs, and virtual volumes (V-VOLs) is not supported.
• During online, the host mode must not be 0x0C [Windows].
• The I/O suppression mode and cache mode settings of LDEVs combined into a LUSE volume must be the same.
• All LDEVs combined into a LUSE volume must be of the same drive type (However, SATA drives and BD drives can be intermixed).
• VMAs are not set to LDEVs.
• LDEVs are not pool volumes (pool-VOLs).
• LDEVs are not journal volumes.
The following are the specifications and restrictions on LDEVs released from a LUSE volume:
• The LUSE volume must not have a defined path.
• The access attribute must be set to Read/Write.
Volume Manager operations using a path-defined LDEV
When you create a LUSE volume, the top LUSE volume can be either an LDEV or LUSE volume that has one or more paths defined to it. Only the top volume in the LUSE volume to be created can have any paths. Other volumes in the LUSE volume to be created must not have any paths.
NOTE:
You can perform a Volume Manager operation using a path-defined LDEV regardless of how many paths are defined to the LDEV.
NOTE:
You cannot combine a path-defined LDEV or LUSE volume with another path-defined LDEV or LUSE volume.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
141
NOTE:
When you start the Volume Manager operation to combine a path-defined LDEV or LUSE volume with another path-defined LDEV or LUSE volume, a confirmation pane appears. Click OK if you want to continue or Cancel if you do not.
CAUTION:
Note the following points when you perform a Volume Manager operation using a path-defined LDEV:
• If a path is defined from a Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, or AIX 5.2 host to an LDEV, you can use the LDEV for Volume Manager operations using a path-defined LDEV. However, if a path is defined from a host running another operating system to an LDEV, you cannot use the LDEV for
Volume Manager operations using a path-defined LDEV.
• If a path is defined from a Windows 2000 or Windows Server 2003 host to an LDEV and you want to perform a Volume Manager operation that handles this path-defined LDEV, ensure that the
Windows host’s host mode is 2C (Windows Extension). If the host mode is not 2C, change the host mode to 2C before performing the Volume Manager operation.
Overview of Custom Volume Size
This section describes the Custom Volume Size (CVS) function, configuring CVS, and requirements of the storage subsystem ID (SSID). CVS operations include:
• Viewing concatenated parity groups
• Converting logical volumes to space
• Creating CVS volumes (Install CV operation)
• Converting CVs back to FVs (Volume Initialize operation)
• Re-creating CVs after initializing the VDEV (Make Volume operation)
CVS function
CVS works on each VDEV that consists of a group of logical volumes (LDEVs or LUs) in a parity group.
Usually, one VDEV consists of some fixed volumes (FV) and some free space. The emulation type determines the number of fixed volumes. A CVS volume usually consists of at least one fixed volume (FV), one or more customized volumes (CVs), and some free space. CVS allows you to configure variable-size volumes, which are usually smaller than normal (fixed-size) volumes. Therefore, if several frequently accessed files are located in the same logical volume, use CVS to reduce conflicts by splitting the logical volumes and scattering the files, although there are some instances where access is delayed while a file is being accessed. This can improve data accessing performance. CVS can also divide a logical volume into smaller ones for a command device, which efficiently exploits the disk’s capacity.
CVS operations include: Volume to Space, Install CV, Volume Initialize, and Make Volume. The Volume to Space function formats one or more LDEVs on a selected Virtual Device (VDEV) into free space. That free space can either be used to install one or more variable-sized volumes (CVs) using the Install CV function, or left as free space for future use. The Volume Initialize function de-installs all variable sized volumes (CVs) under a CVS volume, and reformats the CVS volume as a normal volume (VDEV). The
Make Volume function clears all variable-sized volumes (CVs) under a CVS volume and creates an initial volume (VDEV) consisting of the new user-defined CVs.
For an overview of how the Volume Initialize function works, see
Figure 77 . For an overview of how
the Make Volume function works, see
142
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
Figure 77 Overview of Volume Initialize function
Figure 78 Overview of Make Volume function
Parity group configuration
One parity group consists of a maximum of 16 VDEVs. For RAID-5 (7D + 1P) or RAID-6 (6D + 2P) levels, a maximum of 512 fixed-size volumes (FVs) and a certain amount of free space are available in one
VDEV. For other RAID levels, a maximum of 256 FVs and a certain amount of space are available in one VDEV. Each VDEV in a parity group has the same configuration, and is assigned the same FVs of the same size and RAID level.
CVS functions (Volume to Space, Install CV, Volume Initialize, and Make Volume) are performed on each
VDEV. VDEVs are also separated from each other by the boundary limitation. Therefore, you cannot define a volume across two or more VDEVs beyond the boundaries.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
143
Figure 79 Parity group configuration
As the result of CVS operations, a VDEV contains FVs, CVs, and free spaces that are delimited in logical cylinders. Sequential free spaces are combined into a single free space (see
).
Figure 80 Virtual CVS volume configuration
Volume to Space function
This function converts one or more LDEVs (FVs or CVs) into free space, which deletes the selected LDEVs from that VDEV.
The following are the restrictions on LDEVs and LUSE volumes for the Volume to Space operation:
• The LDEV must not be path-defined (including TrueCopy for z/OS, Continuous Access XP,
ShadowImage for z/OS, Business Copy XP, and Continuous Access XP Journal pair volumes).
• The LDEV must not be a component of a LUSE volume.
• The LDEV must not be reserved for Auto LUN XP.
144
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
• The LDEV must be read/write-enabled.
• The LDEV or LUSE volume must not be a pool volume (pool-VOL).
• The LDEV must not be a journal volume.
• The LDEV must not be a remote command device.
• The LDEV must not contain extents.
Install CV function
This function defines and installs one or more CVS volumes under an existing volume (free space in a
VDEV). You can assign a specific number of physical cylinders (for mainframe systems) or MBs (for open systems) to each CVS volume for maximum control over the volume size. When you specify the capacity and an emulation type other than OPEN-V for a CVS volume to be created, the Install CV function automatically creates and formats the CVS volume in sufficient free space. You must specify new CU and
LDEV numbers for the created CVS volume. The created CVS volume contains the user-specified number of user cylinders and a predetermined number of control cylinders according to the emulation type.
NOTE:
If you select free space and perform an Install CV operation, CVS volumes are created only in the selected free space.
For OPEN-V volumes, there are four ways to create CVS volumes ( Table 22
). You can specify from 46 MB
(50 cylinders) up to the VDEV’s maximum capacity for a CVS volume’s capacity.
Table 22 Creating CVS volumes using Install CV (for OPEN-V)
Install CV method
Specify size and number
Description
Used to specify the capacity and number of CVs in the CVS volume you want to create.
Divide free space by number
Divide free space by size
Set remaining space as volume
Used to create CVS volumes by specifying the number of CVs in the
CVS volume to be created.
Used to create CVS volumes by specifying the capacity of CVs in the
CVS volume to be created.
Used to create a CVS volume using the remaining space on the VDEV.
NOTE:
CVS functions are not available for OPEN-L volumes.
NOTE:
The install CV function allocates CVS volumes in the order in which the function finds sufficient free space for the CVS volumes. For optimum space allocation, allocate CVS volumes in descending order of capacity.
lists the CVS specifications and the minimum and maximum CVS volume capacities for mainframe and open systems.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
145
Table 23 CVS specifications
Parameter
Track format
Mainframe systems
3380, 3390
Emulation type
NOTE:
Emulation types followed by an asterisk
(*) can be used only with Fujitsu mainframe systems. Do not use these emulation types if you are not using Fujitsu mainframe systems.
Ability to intermix emulation types
Maximum number of volumes (normal and
CVS) per VDEV
Maximum number of volumes (normal and
CVS) per array
Minimum size for one
CVS volume
Maximum size for one
CVS volume
Size increment
Disk location for CVS volumes
3380-3, 3380-3A,
3380-3B, 3380-3C,
3380-F*, 3380-K*,
3380-KA*, 3380-KB*,
3380-KC*
3390-3, 3390-3A,
3390-3B, 3390-3C,
3390-3R, 3390-9,
3390-9A, 3390-9B,
3390-9C, 3390-L,
3390-LA, 3390-LB,
3390-LC, 3390-M,
3390-MA, 3390-MB,
3390-MC
NF80-F*, NF80-K*,
NF80-KA*, NF80-KB*,
NF80-KC*
Depends on the track geometry
512 for RAID5 (7D+1P) or RAID6 (6D + 2P)
256 for other RAID levels
16,384
1 user cylinder (+ control cylinders)
See
1 user cylinder
Anywhere
Open systems
OPEN-3, OPEN-8,
OPEN-9, OPEN-E
OPEN-3, OPEN-8,
OPEN-9, OPEN-E
Depends on the track geometry
512 for RAID5 (7D+1P) or RAID6 (6D + 2P)
256 for other RAID levels
16,384
36,000 KB (+ control cylinders)
See
1 MB
Anywhere
OPEN-V
OPEN-V
Depends on the track geometry
512 for RAID5 (7D+1P) or RAID6 (6D + 2P)
256 for other RAID levels
16,384
48,000 KB (50 cylinders)
See
1 MB (1 user cylinder)
Anywhere
146
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
3380-3
3380-3A
3380-3B
3380-3C
3380-F
3380-K
3380-KA
3380-KB
3380-KC
3390-3
3390-3A
3390-3B
3390-3C
3390-3R
3390-9
3390-9A
3390-9B
3390-9C
3390-L
3390-LA
3390-LB
3390-LC
3390-M
3390-MA
3390-MB
3390-MC
NF80-F
NF80-K
NF80-KA
NF80-KB
NF80-KC
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 24 CV capacity by emulation type (mainframe systems)
Emulation type
Minimum CV capacity
(Cyl)
Maximum CV capacity
(Cyl)
3,983
2,655
2,655
2,655
2,655
32,760
32,760
32,760
32,760
65,520
65,520
65,520
65,520
2,655
3,339
3,339
3,339
3,339
3,339
10,017
10,017
10,017
10,017
3,339
3,339
3,339
3,339
3,983
2,655
2,655
2,655
7
7
Number of control cylinders (Cyl)
53
53
53
53
23
23
23
23
7
7
22
7
7
6
6
6
25
25
25
25
6
6
7
7
7
7
22
7
7
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
147
Table 25 CV capacity by emulation type (open systems)
Emulation type
Minimum CV capacity
(CYL)
OPEN-V 48,000 KB
Maximum CV capacity
(CYL)
OPEN-3
OPEN-8
OPEN-9
OPEN-E
36,000 KB (50 Cyl)
36,000 KB (50 Cyl)
36,000 KB (50 Cyl)
36,000 KB (50 Cyl)
3,019,898,880 KB (2.8125
TB)
2,403,360 KB
7,175,520 KB
7,211,520 KB
14,226,480 KB
Number of control cylinders (Cyl)
0 KB (0 Cyl)
5,760 KB (8 Cyl)
19,440 KB (27 Cyl)
19,440 KB (27 Cyl)
13,680 KB (19 Cyl)
NOTE:
CVS functions are not applicable to OPEN-L volumes.
Calculating CV capacity for mainframe systems
When creating a CV, you can specify the CV’s capacity. However, there is a margin of error between the user-specified CV capacity and the actual CV capacity. To estimate the actual CV capacity, use the following formula. The resulting CV capacity is expressed in megabytes.
↑ (user-specified-CV-capacity + management-area-capacity) × 15 × capacity-of-a-slot ÷ boundary-value ↑
× boundary-value ÷ 1024
NOTE:
• Round up the value enclosed by two up arrows (↑) to the nearest whole number.
• The user-specified CV capacity is expressed in cylinders.
• The management area capacity is expressed in cylinders (see
).
• The boundary value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volume emulation types and RAID levels (see
).
• The slot capacity is expressed in kilobytes. The slot capacity depends on the volume emulation types (see
).
Calculating CV capacity for open systems
When creating a CV, you can specify the CV’s capacity. However, there is a margin of error between the user-specified CV capacity and the actual CV capacity.
This section explains how to calculate the user area capacity and the entire capacity. The term “user area capacity” refers to the capacity of areas in a CV that can contain user data.
If the emulation type is OPEN-V
The methods for calculating the CV’s user area capacity and the entire capacity vary depending on the
CV capacity unit specified when creating the CV.
• If the CV capacity unit is megabytes (MB):
To calculate the CV’s user area capacity, use the following formula. The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
↑↑ user-specified-CV-capacity × 1024 ÷ 64 ↑ ÷ 15 ↑ × 64 × 15
148
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
NOTE:
• Round up the value enclosed by two up arrows (↑) to the nearest whole number.
• The user-specified CV capacity is expressed in megabytes.
To calculate the CV’s entire capacity, use the following formula. The resulting entire capacity is expressed in megabytes:
↑ user-area-capacity ÷ boundary-value ↑ × boundary-value ÷ 1024
NOTE:
• Round up the value enclosed by two up arrows (↑) to the nearest whole number.
• The user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
• The boundary value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volume emulation types and RAID levels (see
• If the CV capacity unit is cylinders (Cyl):
To calculate the CV’s user area capacity, use the following formula. The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
user-specified-CV-capacity × 64 × 15
NOTE:
The user-specified CV capacity is expressed in cylinders.
To calculate the CV’s entire capacity, use the following formula. The resulting entire capacity is expressed in megabytes.
↑
user-area-capacity ÷ boundary-value ↑ × boundary-value ÷ 1024
NOTE:
• Round up the value enclosed by two up arrows (↑) to the nearest whole number.
• The user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
• The boundary value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volume emulation types and RAID levels (see
• If the CV capacity unit is blocks:
To calculate the CV’s user area capacity, use the following formula. The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
user-specified-CV-capacity ÷ 2
NOTE:
The user-specified CV capacity is expressed in blocks.
To calculate the CV’s entire capacity, use the following formula. The resulting entire capacity is expressed in blocks. To convert the resulting entire capacity into megabytes, divide this capacity by 2,048.
↑
user-specified-CV-capacity ÷ (boundary-value × 2) ↑ × (boundary-value × 2)
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
149
NOTE:
• Round up the value enclosed by two up arrows (↑) to the nearest whole number.
• The user-specified CV capacity is expressed in blocks.
• The boundary value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volume emulation types and RAID levels (see
If the emulation type is other than OPEN-V
• If the CV capacity unit is MB (megabytes):
To calculate the CV’s user area capacity, use the following formula. The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
↑↑ user-specified-CV-capacity × 1024 ÷ capacity-of-a-slot ↑ ÷ 15 ↑ × capacity-of-a-slot × 15
NOTE:
• Round up the value enclosed by two up arrows (↑) to the nearest whole number.
• The user-specified CV capacity is expressed in megabytes.
• The slot capacity is expressed in kilobytes. The slot capacity depends on volume emulation types (see
To calculate the CV’s entire capacity, use the following formula. The resulting entire capacity is expressed in megabytes.
↑
(user-area-capacity + management-area-capacity) ÷ boundary-value ↑ × boundary-value ÷ 1024
NOTE:
• Round up the value enclosed by two up arrows (↑) to the nearest whole number.
• The user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
• The management area capacity is expressed in kilobytes. The management area capacity depends on volume emulation types (see
).
• The boundary value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volume emulation types and RAID levels (see
• If the CV capacity unit is blocks:
To calculate the CV’s user area capacity, use the following formula. The resulting user area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
user-specified-CV-capacity ÷ 2
NOTE:
The user-specified CV capacity is expressed in blocks.
To calculate the CV’s entire capacity, use the following formula. The resulting entire capacity is expressed in blocks. To convert the resulting entire capacity into megabytes, divide this capacity by 2,048.
↑
(user-specified-CV-capacity + management-area-capacity × 2) ÷ (boundary-value × 2) ↑ ×
(boundary-value × 2)
150
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
NOTE:
• Round up the value enclosed by two up arrows (↑) to the nearest whole number.
• The user-specified CV capacity is expressed in blocks.
• The management area capacity is expressed in kilobytes. The management area capacity depends on volume emulation types (see
• The boundary value is expressed in kilobytes. The boundary value depends on volume emulation types and RAID levels (see
Table 26 Management area capacity of mainframe volumes
Emulation type
3380-3, 3380-3A, 3380-3B, 3380-3C,
3380-K, 3380-KA, 3380-KB, 3380-KC,
NF80-K, NF80-KA, NF80-KB, NF80-KC
Management area capacity
7
3390-3, 3390-3R, 3390-3A, 3390-3B, 3390-3C 6
3390-9, 3390-9A, 3390-9B, 3390-9C 25
3390-L, 3390-LA, 3390-LB, 3390-LC
3390-M, 3390-MA, 3390-MB, 3390-MC
3380-F, NF80-F
23
53
22
NOTE:
A mainframe volume’s management area capacity is expressed in cylinders.
Table 27 Management area capacity of open-system volumes
Emulation type
OPEN-V
OPEN-3
Management area capacity
0
OPEN-8
OPEN-9
OPEN-E
5,760
19,440
19,440
13,680
NOTE:
An open-system volume’s management area capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
151
Table 28 Boundary value for RAID levels
Emulation type
3380-xx
3390-xx
OPEN-xx (except for OPEN-V)
OPEN-V
Boundary value for RAID1
(2D+2D)
768
928
768
1,024
Boundary value for RAID5
(3D+1P)
1,152
1,392
1,152
1,536
Boundary value for RAID5
(7D+1P)
2,688
3,248
2,688
3,584
Boundary value for RAID6
(6D+2P)
2,304
2,784
2,304
3,072
NOTE:
• The xx is a variable indicating one or more numbers or letters.
• Boundary values are expressed in kilobytes.
• Boundary values of external LUs are always one kilobyte, regardless of RAID levels.
Table 29 Slot capacities
Emulation type
3380-xx, NF80-xx
3390-xx
OPEN-xx (except for OPEN-V)
OPEN-V
Slot capacity
48
58
48
256
NOTE:
• The xx is a variable indicating one or more numbers or letters.
• Slot capacity is expressed in kilobytes.
Volume Initialize and Make Volume functions
You can initialize a CVS volume using one of the following functions: Volume Initialize or Make Volume.
The Volume Initialize operation de-installs all variable-sized volumes under a CVS volume, and reformats the CVS volume as a normal volume (FV). You must assign CU and LDEV numbers to the new formatted
FV. Any existing FVs on the original VDEV are not reformatted.
The Make Volume operation deletes all volumes in a VDEV, and creates new variable-sized volumes (CVs) according to the specified settings. You can specify the following settings (see
152
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
Table 30 Settings for the Make Volume operation (OPEN-V only)
No.
1
Setting
Specify the capacity and number of variable-sized volumes (CVs) under a CVS volume.
CVS volumes to be created
A CVS volume that has the specified number of
CVs of the specified capacity is created. This is the same as the Install CV operation.
2
Specify the number of variable-sized volumes
(CVs).
A CVS volume that has the specified number of CVs is created (the VDEV is divided by the specified number).
3
Specify the capacity of a variable-sized volume
(CV).
A CVS volume that has CVs of the specified capacity is created (the VDEV is divided by the specified capacity).
4
Specify the remaining capacity for a CVS volume.
If some space remains in the VDEV after CVS volumes are created by settings 1through 3, that remaining space can also be converted into a
CVS volume.
The following are the restrictions on CVs for the Volume Initialize function (other than OPEN-V):
• The CV must not be path-defined (including TrueCopy for z/OS, Continuous Access XP,
ShadowImage for z/OS, Business Copy XP, and Continuous Access XP Journal pair volumes).
• The CV must not be a component of a LUSE volume.
• The CV must not be reserved for Auto LUN XP.
• The CV must be read/write-enabled.
• The CV must not be a pool volume (pool-VOL)
• The CV must not be a journal volume.
• The CV must not be remote command device.
• The CV must not contain extents.
The following are the restrictions on CVs for the Make Volume function:
• The CV must not be path-defined (including TrueCopy for z/OS, Continuous Access XP,
ShadowImage for z/OS, Business Copy XP, and Continuous Access XP Journal pair volumes).
• The CV must not be reserved for Auto LUN XP.
• LUSE volumes concatenated with one or more LDEVs belonging to a different VDEV must not exist.
• The CV must be read/write-enabled.
• The CV must not be a pool volume (pool-VOL)
• The CV must not be a journal volume.
• The CV must not be a remote command device.
• The CV must not contain extents.
If the VDEV contains a CV that violates any of the restrictions, the Volume Initialize and Make Volume functions are disabled. You must eliminate invalid CVs before performing the Volume Initialize and
Make Volume functions.
SSID requirements
The array is configured with one SSID for each of 256 devices and up to four SSIDs per CU image.
Each SSID must be unique within each host system.
shows the relationship between emulation types of controllers and SSIDs.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
153
Table 31 SSID requirements
Controller emulation type
SSID requirement CVS support
3990-6, 3990-6E (0104) x
- (FFFD) x
3390-3, 3390-3A, 3390-3B, 3390-3C,
3390-9, 3390-9A, 3390-9B, 3390-9C,
OPEN-3, OPEN-8, OPEN-9, OPEN-E, and OPEN-V volumes
2105-F20, 2107 (0104) x
- (FFFD) x
3380-3, 3380-3A, 3380-3B, 3380-3C,
3390-3, 3390-3A, 3390-3B, 3390-3C, 3390-3R
3390-9, 3390-9A, 3390-9B, 3390-9C,
3390-L, 3390-LA, 3390-LB, 3390-LC,
3390-M, 3390-MA, 3390-MB, 3390-MC,
OPEN-3, OPEN-8, OPEN-9, OPEN-E, and OPEN-V volumes
Requirements for CU groups
If you are using HP StorageWorks LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP, you can apply Volume
Manager functions to open-systems volumes belonging to CU group 0 (zero), but not to volumes in other
CU groups. If you are using Custom Volume Size (CVS), you can apply Volume Manager functions to mainframe volumes, regardless of which CU group the volumes belong to. For more information about CU groups, see the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
154
Overview of Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
8 Preparing to use Volume
Manager or Custom Volume Size
This chapter describes the environment you must prepare to operate Volume Manager or Custom Volume
Size (CVS).
System requirements
To operate Volume Manager or CVS, you need the following:
• XP12000/XP10000/SVS200 array
• Command View XP computer or XP Remote Web Console
• Licensed Volume Manager and/or CVS software
NOTE:
To use the Volume Manager or CVS function, you need the software called HP StorageWorks LUN
Configuration and Security Manager XP.
Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console requirements
For more information about the environment necessary for the Command View XP PC, see the
HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays. You must use a Command View
XP PC adapted to the PC environment. Connect the Command View XP PC to be used for arrays via a
TCP/IP network.
Installing Volume Manager and CVS
Install the software necessary to operate Volume Manager and CVS. For instructions, see the
HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote
Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
Connecting to the array
To connect the Command View XP PC to the array, take the following steps:
1.
Enter the URL of the primary SVP in the Web browser to access the primary SVP. The Storage
Device List pane appears.
2.
Select the desired array.
3.
Enter the user ID and password, and click OK. The Command View XP PC is connected to the array, and the Command View XP main pane appears.
For more information about using the Command View XP PC, see the HP StorageWorks Command
View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays.
Starting Volume Manager and CVS
1.
Connect the Command View XP PC to the array, and open the Command View XP or XP Remote
Web Console main pane. For instructions, see the HP StorageWorks Command View XP user
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
155
guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for
XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
2.
From the option buttons on the left of the Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console main pane for activating the array’s features, click the Volume Manager button ( ). The Volume
Manager main pane appears and enables you to operate Volume Manager or CVS.
3.
The Volume Manager pane is the initial pane that appears. To operate CVS, click the Customized
Volume tab.
NOTE:
• To exit Volume Manager, click the button (Exit) on the upper right of the Command View XP or
XP Remote Web Console main pane or end the Web browser.
• The initial Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console main pane appears in View mode. To implement any changes for Volume Manager or CVS, you must change the operation mode to
Modify mode. For more information, see
.
Changing to Modify mode
To implement any changes for Volume Manager or CVS, you must be in Modify mode. The array
and
) are on the upper right of the pane. These icons are described in detail in the HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the
HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200. To change from
View mode to Modify mode and back, two icons are important.
• Exclusive lock icons indicate the operation mode of all currently logged-in users. If all users are operating in View mode, the Unlocked icon ( ) appears. If a user is operating in Modify mode, or if array maintenance or SNMP operations are being performed, the Locked icon ( ) appears.
• Mode Changing icons allow users to change the operation mode between View mode () and
Modify mode ( ).
NOTE:
Only one user at a time can be in Modify mode.
1.
You must have write permission for Volume Manager. For more information about assigning write permission to a user ID, see the HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
2.
Verify that the array is unlocked. If all users are operating in View mode, the Unlocked ( ) and View
Mode ( ) icons appear ( Figure 81
). If a user is operating in Modify mode or if array maintenance is being performed, the Locked icon ( ) appears and you cannot change to Modify mode.
3.
Select the Mode Changing icon ( ), which should be in View mode. A confirmation message
). Click OK.
The Mode Changing icon changes from View mode to Modify mode ( ), and the Unlocked icon
( ) changes to the Locked icon ( ) (
Change back to View mode once you have applied the necessary changes. To go back to the View
mode, select the Mode Changing icon ( ). If a confirmation message appears ( Figure 82 ) click OK.
You are back to View mode.
156
Preparing to use Volume Manager or Custom Volume Size
Figure 81 Icons showing Unlocked status and View mode
Figure 82 Mode changing confirmation message
Figure 83 Icons showing Locked status and Modify mode
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
157
158
Preparing to use Volume Manager or Custom Volume Size
9 Volume Manager operations
This chapter describes Volume Manager operations.
Volume Manager panes
This section describes components of the Volume Manager panes.
Volume Manager main pane
To open the Volume Manager pane, click the Volume Manager button ( ).
Figure 84 Volume Manager pane
The Volume Manager pane has the following features.
LDEV Information tree
This tree is on the upper-left of the Volume Manager pane. The LDEV Information tree displays an outline view of the CU and LDEV numbers installed on the array (for example, CU 01 has a number of LDEVs, including 01:00). The LDEV number’s format changes if the LDEV is an expanded (LUSE) volume (for example, if LDEV volume 01:00 consists of five concatenated LDEVs, its number is 01:00*5). One of the following icons appear.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
159
Table 32 LDEV status icons
Icon LDEV status
Normal LDEV
Variable-sized volume (CV)
Expanded (LUSE) volume
LDEV Information table
This table is in the upper-right of the Volume Manager pane, and displays data for the LDEV you select in the LDEV Information tree.
The LDEV Information table displays detailed information for all open-system LDEVs in the selected CU. If you select a normal LDEV, the information in this table is for the top LDEV. If you select a LUSE volume, the information in this table is for all LDEVs in the LUSE volume. The table displays the following information:
• LDEV: LDEV status icon (
Table 32 ) and the CU and LDEV numbers. If the selected LDEV is a LUSE
volume, the LDEV number of the top LDEV in the LUSE volume appears.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:01V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about V-VOLs, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
•
Emulation: Emulation type. If the selected LDEV is a LUSE volume, the emulation type appears with an asterisk and the number of volumes in the LUSE volume (for example, OPEN-E*5). If the selected LDEV is a CVS volume, the emulation type appears with CVS (for example, OPEN-3 CVS).
•
Capacity: LDEV capacity in either MB or GB, depending on the unit selected in the Capacity
Unit box.
• RAID: LDEV’s RAID level.
NOTE:
The RAID level is left unspecified with a hyphen (-) when the LDEV is an external LU or virtual volume (V-VOL).
• PG: Combination of the disk group and parity group. If the LDEV extends over two or more parity groups, the smaller parity group number appears.
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with E (for example, E1-1), the parity group consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with V (for example, V1-1), the parity group consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
160
Volume Manager operations
• Paths: Number of paths set for the LDEV. If this column displays the number of paths for an LDEV, you can use the LDEV as the top LDEV of a LUSE volume (see
Volume Manager operations using a path-defined LDEV
).
• Access Attribute: Access attribute set for the LDEV.
• IO Suppression Mode: Displays Disable when I/O requests from hosts are suppressed, or Enable if I/O requests from hosts are not suppressed.
• Cache Mode: Displays Disable when cache is set to be unused for responding to I/O requests from hosts, or Enable when cache is set to be used for responding to I/O requests from hosts.
• Ex-Dev Info.: Displays the LDEV’s drive type. Displays an asterisk (*) when the drive type is SATA or BD drive. Displays nothing when the drive type is not SATA.
• CLPR: ID of the cache logical partition (CLPR) to which the displayed volumes belong. The CLPR
ID is composed of a CLPR number (two-digit) and a CLPR name (maximum of 16 characters)
Capacity Unit box
Capacity of the LDEV displayed in the Capacity column, in either GB (default) or MB.
Selected LDEVs
Number of LDEVs selected in the LDEV Information table.
Select an LDEV list
Displays the selected CU’s LDEVs, CVS volumes, and LUSE volumes that are eligible to become part of a
LUSE volume. The selected LDEV number becomes the top LDEV number of a LUSE volume.
Volume Count list
Number of LDEVs forming a LUSE volume.
For example, if you select 3 in the Volume Count list, three LDEVs are expected to form a LUSE volume and three LDEVs are added to the Expanded LDEVs list.
NOTE:
You can select only LDEVs from the Volume Count list. You cannot select LUSE volumes.
Free LDEVs table
Displays the LDEVs, CVS volumes, or LUSE volumes selected in the Select an LDEV list that are eligible to become part of a LUSE volume.
• LDEV: LDEV status icon (
) and CU and LDEV numbers. If the selected LDEV is a LUSE volume, the LDEV number of the top LDEV in the LUSE volume appears.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:01V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about V-VOLs, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
• RAID: LDEV’s RAID level.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
161
NOTE:
The RAID level is left unspecified with a hyphen (-) when the LDEV is an external LU or virtual volume (V-VOL).
• PG: Combination of the disk group and parity group. If the LDEV extends over two or more parity groups, the smaller parity group number appears.
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with E (for example, E1-1), the parity group consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with V (for example, V1-1), the parity group consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• CLPR: CLPR number and name. The CLPR number consists of two digits. The CLPR name consists of up to six characters. For more information about cache logical partitions (CLPRs), see the
HP StorageWorks XP Disk/Cache Partition user guide.
• Selected LDEVs: Number of LDEVs selected in the Free LDEVs table.
Expanded LDEVs list
Displays LDEVs selected as LUSE volume components. An LDEV is added to this list by clicking Add.
• Selected LDEVs: Number of LDEVs selected in the Expanded LDEVs list.
• Number of LDEVs: Number of LDEVs displayed in the Expanded LDEVs list.
• Size: Total capacity of LDEVs displayed in the Expanded LDEVs list, in either GB or MG.
Buttons
• Add: Moves the selected LDEV from the Free LDEVs table to the Expanded LDEVs list.
• Delete: Move the selected LDEV from the Expanded LDEVs list to the Free LDEVs table.
• Set: Creates a LUSE volume consisting of the volumes currently in the Expanded LDEVs list. The new LUSE appears in blue bold italics on the LDEV Information table, but is not actually created until you click Apply.
• Apply: Implements settings on the array.
• Cancel: Cancels settings.
Volume Manager operations shortcut menu
When you right-click one of the LDEVs in the LDEV Information table on the Volume Manager pane, a shortcut menu listing commands for Volume Manager operations appears.
Figure 85 Volume Manager operations shortcut menu
• Set LUSE Volume
162
Volume Manager operations
Displays the Set LUSE confirmation pane (
Figure 86 ). You can confirm whether or not you want to
continue the operation to create a LUSE volume. For more information, see
.
• Release LUSE Volume
Displays the Release LUSE confirmation pane ( Figure 87
). You can confirm whether or not you want to continue the operation to release a LUSE volume. For more information, see
.
• Reset LUSE Volume
Displays the Reset LUSE confirmation pane (
Figure 88 ). You can confirm whether or not you want to
continue the operation to release an unregistered LUSE volume. For more information, see
Resetting unregistered LUSE volumes
.
• Concatenation List
Displays the Concatenation List pane ( Figure 89
). For more information, see
Viewing concatenated parity groups .
Set LUSE Confirmation pane
When you right-click the free LDEVs you want to form the LUSE volume in the LDEV Information table, and select Set LUSE Volume, the Set LUSE Confirmation pane appears. You can verify that the LDEVs listed in the confirmation pane are the ones you want to create a LUSE volume.
Figure 86 Set LUSE Confirmation pane
• LUSE components list
Displays information about LDEVs that constitute the LUSE volume.
• LDEV: LDEV icon, CU number, and LDEV number.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:01V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about V-VOLs, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
163
• Emulation: LDEV’s emulation type.
• Capacity: LDEV’s capacity.
• OK: Creates the LUSE volume and sets the LUSE volume configuration to have LDEVs in the
LUSE components list. LDEVs registered as components of the LUSE volume appear in blue bold italics in the LDEV Information table.
• Cancel: Cancels the operation to create a LUSE volume using LDEVs in the list.
Release LUSE Confirmation pane
When you select Release LUSE Volume, the Release LUSE Confirmation pane appears. You can verify that the LUSE volumes listed in the confirmation pane are the ones you want released.
NOTE:
If the selected LUSE volume has a path or if you selected anything other than a LUSE volume, this pane lists only LDEVs containing a LUSE volume to be released.
Figure 87 Release LUSE Confirmation pane
• LDEVs containing a LUSE volume to be released
Displays LDEVs containing LUSE volumes to be released.
• LDEV: LDEV icon, CU number, and LDEV number.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide .
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:01V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about V-VOLs, see the HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide .
• Emulation: LDEV’s emulation type.
• Capacity: LDEV’s capacity.
• OK: Releases the LUSE volume configuration in the release list. Released LDEVs appear in blue bold italics in the LDEV Information table.
164
Volume Manager operations
• Cancel: Cancels the release Volume Manager operation.
Reset LUSE Confirmation pane
When you select Reset LUSE Volume from the Volume Manager operation shortcut menu, the following pane appears. You can confirm the LDEV that is still not registered to the array as a LUSE volume and whether or not you want to reset this unregistered LUSE volume to the state it was in before it was created.
Figure 88 Reset LUSE Confirmation pane
• Unregistered LUSE volume list
Displays LDEVs created into a LUSE volume but not yet registered to the array that you can reset to the state they were in before they were created.
• LDEV: LDEV icon, CU number, and LDEV number.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:01V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about V-VOLs, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
• Emulation: LDEV’s emulation type.
• Capacity: LDEV’s capacity.
• OK: Resets the unregistered LUSE volume to the state it was in before it was created.
• Cancel: Cancels the reset LUSE operation.
Concatenation List pane
In the array, data can be written to an LDEV that extends over concatenated parity groups. Concatenation of parity groups enables faster access to data.
To view a concatenated parity group, right-click the free LDEVs you want to form the LUSE volume in the LDEV Information table. If parity groups are concatenated, a shortcut menu appears. Select
Concatenation List to display the Concatenation List pane.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
165
Figure 89 Concatenation List pane
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with E (for example, E1-1), the parity group consists of one or more external LUs.
Volume Manager operations
This section provides instructions for performing Volume Manager operations.
Preparing to use Volume Manager
Before starting a Volume Manager operation on a selected array, unmount the open system volumes, and remove the LU paths to the open volumes. For instructions, see
.
Volume Manager operations
If you are going to implement changes for Volume Manager, you must have write permission for Volume
Manager, and must be in Modify mode. The array information icons are on the upper right corner. These icons are described in detail in the HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
Viewing LUSE configuration information
You can view the current LUSE configuration on the Volume Manager pane (
).
• The LDEV Information tree displays an outline view of CU and LDEV numbers installed on the array in a hierarchical structure.
• The LDEV Information table displays detailed information for all open-system LDEVs in the selected
CU. If you select a normal LDEV, information in this table is for the top LDEV. If you select a LUSE volume, information in this table is for all the LDEVs in the LUSE volume.
166
Volume Manager operations
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:01V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about V-VOLs, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
Viewing concatenated parity groups
1.
From the Volume Manager pane, select a CU number in the LDEV Information tree. The LDEV
Information table displays all LDEVs in the selected CU.
2.
In the LDEV Information table, right-click the free LDEVs you want to form the LUSE volume. If parity groups are concatenated, a shortcut menu appears.
NOTE:
Concatenation List does parity groups.
not appear if the selected LDEV does not extend over concatenated
3.
Select Concatenation List. The Concatenation List pane (
4.
When you are finished viewing the list, click OK (or Cancel).
Creating LUSE volumes
CAUTION:
LUSE creation is a destructive operation. Move and/or back up your data before proceeding.
There are three ways to create a LUSE volume:
• Creating LUSE volumes using the Volume Count list
(recommended)
• Creating LUSE volumes using the Select an LDEV list
• Creating LUSE volumes using the LDEV information table
Creating LUSE volumes using the Volume Count list
1.
From the Volume Manager pane, select a CU number to create a LUSE volume from the LDEV
Information tree.
2.
In the Select an LDEV list, select a top LDEV of the LUSE volume.
The selected top volume appears in the Expanded LDEVs list. Normal LDEVs, CVS volumes, and
LUSE volumes that can be used for a LUSE volume appear in the Free LDEVs table.
3.
In the Volume Count list, select the number of LDEVs needed to form a LUSE volume.
The Expanded LDEVs list displays as many LDEVs as specified in the Volume Count list. For example, if you select 3 in the Volume Count list, three LDEVS appear in the Expanded LDEVs list.
NOTE:
You cannot select LUSE volumes in the Volume Count list. To select LUSE volumes, select
LDEVs from the Free LDEVs table, and click Add.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
167
a. To add more LDEVs to the Expanded LDEVs list, select normal LDEVs, CVS volumes, or LUSE volumes in the Free LDEVs table, and click Add.
b. To delete LDEVs from the Expanded LDEVs list, select the LDEVs in the Expanded LDEVs list, and click Delete.
4.
Click Set.
A pane appears. If the displayed pane asks whether you want to perform a Volume Manager operation on a volume that has a path definition (see
Volume Manager operations using a path-defined LDEV
for more information about this operation), follow step 4a. If the Set LUSE
Confirmation pane appears, follow step 4b.
a. If the displayed pane asks whether you want to perform a Volume Manager operation on a volume that has a path definition, click OK. A confirmation message appears. Go to step 5.
To cancel the Volume Manager operation, click Cancel. The previous pane appears, and you can retry the operation.
b. If the Set LUSE Confirmation pane appears, go to step 5.
5.
To create the LUSE, click OK. The selected top LDEV appears (in blue bold italics) as a LUSE volume in the LDEV Information table.
NOTE:
You can reset LUSE volumes that have been created but not yet registered to the array
(those in blue bold italics) to the state they were in before they were created (see
Resetting unregistered LUSE volumes ).
6.
Click Apply.
7.
Click OK (or Cancel). Settings for this Volume Manager operation are registered for the array.
Creating LUSE volumes using the Select an LDEV list
CAUTION:
Creating a LUSE volume destroys existing data. To protect the data, make a backup copy of the existing data before starting the LUSE creation operation.
1.
In the Volume Manager pane, select a CU number in the LDEV Information tree.
2.
In the Select an LDEV list, select the first LDEV for the LUSE from the Free LDEVs table that displays available LDEVs.
3.
Select one or more additional normal LDEVs, CVS volumes, or LUSE volumes for the LUSE volume.
Click Add to move selected LDEVs from the Free LDEVs table to the Expanded LDEVs list.
4.
To delete an LDEV from the Expanded LDEVs list and move it back to the Free LDEVs table, select one or more volumes, and click Delete.
5.
Click Set.
A pane appears. If the displayed pane asks whether you want to perform a Volume Manager operation on a volume that has a path definition (see
), follow step 5a. If the displayed pane asks whether you want to perform an Volume Manager operation that affects more than one
SLPR or CLPR, follow step 5b. If the Set LUSE Confirmation pane appears, follow step 5c.
a. To perform a Volume Manager operation on a volume that has a path definition (see
85 ), click OK. If a message appears asking whether you want to perform a Volume Manager
operation that affects more than one SLPR or CLPR, go to step 5b. If such a message does not appear, go to step 6.
If you do not want to perform a Volume Manager operation on a volume that has a path definition, click Cancel. The previous pane appears, and you can retry the operation.
168
Volume Manager operations
b. To perform a Volume Manager operation that affects more than one SLPR or CLPR, click OK. A confirmation pane appears. Go to step 6.
If you do not want to perform a Volume Manager operation that affects more than one SLPR or
CLPR, click Cancel. The previous pane appears, and you can retry the operation.
c. If the Set LUSE Confirmation pane appears, go to step 6.
6.
Click OK (or Cancel).
NOTE:
New settings appear on the pane in blue bold italics are not yet registered to the array.
You cannot reset LUSE volumes that have been created but not yet registered to the array
(those in blue bold italics) to the state they were in before they were created (see
Resetting unregistered LUSE volumes ).
7.
Click Apply (or Cancel).
8.
Click OK.
Creating LUSE volumes using the LDEV information table
1.
In the Volume Manager pane, select a CU number in the LDEV Information tree. The LDEV
Information table displays all LDEVs in the selected CU.
2.
In the LDEV Information table, right-click the normal LDEVs, CVS volumes, or LUSE volumes you want to form the LUSE volume, and select Set LUSE Volume.
A pane appears. If the displayed pane asks whether you want to perform a Volume Manager operation on a volume that has a path definition (see
Figure 85 ), follow step 2a. If the displayed
pane asks whether you want to perform a Volume Manager operation that affects more than one
SLPR or CLPR, follow step 2b. If the Set LUSE Confirmation pane appears, follow step 2c.
a. To perform a Volume Manager operation on a volume that has a path definition (see
85 ), click OK. If a message appears asking whether you want to perform a Volume Manager
operation that affects more than one SLPR or CLPR, go to step 2b. If such a message does not appear, go to step 3.
If you do not want to perform a Volume Manager operation on a volume that has a path definition, click Cancel. The previous pane appears, and you can retry the operation.
b. To perform a Volume Manager operation that affects more than one SLPR or CLPR, click OK. A confirmation pane appears. Go to step 3.
If you do not want to perform a Volume Manager operation that affects more than one SLPR or
CLPR, click Cancel. The previous pane appears, and you can retry the operation.
c. If the Set LUSE Confirmation pane appears, go to step 3.
3.
Click OK to create the LUSE volume (or Cancel).
NOTE:
New settings appearing on the pane in blue bold italics are not yet registered to the array.
You can reset LUSE volumes that have been created but not yet registered to the array
(in blue bold italics) to the state they were in before they were created (see
Resetting unregistered LUSE volumes ).
4.
Click Apply (or Cancel).
5.
Click OK (or Cancel).
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
169
Releasing LUSE volumes
CAUTION:
Releasing LUSE volumes is a destructive operation. Move and/or back up data before proceeding.
Delete all SCSI paths to the LUSE volume you want released.
1.
In the Volume Manager pane, select the CU number from the LDEV Information tree. The LDEV
Information table displays all LDEVs in the selected CU.
2.
In the LDEV Information table, right-click a LUSE volume, and select Release LUSE Volume. The
Release LUSE Confirmation pane appears.
3.
Verify that the LUSE volumes listed in the confirmation pane are the ones you want released.
4.
Click OK (or Cancel).
NOTE:
New settings appear on the Volume Manager pane in blue bold italics, but are not yet implemented.
5.
Click Apply (or Cancel).
6.
Click OK (or Cancel).
Changing LUSE capacities
There are two ways to change a LUSE volume’s capacity:
• Expanding LUSE capacities
To expand a LUSE volume’s capacity, select the LUSE volume you want to expand, and add LDEVs or
LUSE volumes; or first select the LDEVs or LUSE volumes you want to add, and select a LUSE volume to be expanded. For more information, see
• Reducing LUSE capacities
You cannot reduce an existing LUSE volume’s capacity. If you want a LUSE volume to have a smaller capacity, you must first release the LUSE volume (see
), and redefine the LUSE volume (see
Resetting unregistered LUSE volumes
When you create a LUSE volume, it remains highlighted in blue bold italics until you register it into the array by clicking Apply. A LUSE volume in blue bold italics indicates you can reset this LUSE volume to the state it was in before it was created.
NOTE:
You can use this function to reset an unregistered LUSE volume to the state it was in before it was created.
However, you cannot recover LUSE volumes that have already been released to the state they were in when they were created. Therefore, if the LUSE volume you created consists of any LDEVs (those in blue bold italics) that have been released from a different LUSE volume, you can only reset the LUSE volume to the state it was in when the constituting LDEVs were released from the other LUSE volume.
1.
In the Volume Manager pane, select a CU number from the LDEV Information tree. The LDEV
Information table displays all LDEVs in the selected CU.
2.
In the LDEV Information table, right-click an unregistered LUSE volume (in blue bold italics), and select Reset Selected Volume. The Reset LUSE Confirmation pane appears.
170
Volume Manager operations
3.
Click OK.
The setting of the selected LUSE volume that is not registered yet is reset to the state it was in before this LUSE volume was created, and the LUSE volumes or LDEVs constituting the selected LUSE volume that has just been reset appear in the LDEV Information table.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
171
172
Volume Manager operations
10 Custom Volume Size operations
This chapter describes Custom Volume Size (CVS) operations.
Custom Volume Size panes
This section describes components of the Customized Volume pane.
Customized Volume pane
To open the Customized Volume pane:
1.
Click the Volume Manager button ( ). The Volume Manager pane appears.
2.
Click the Customized Volume tab. The Customized Volume pane appears.
Figure 90 Customized Volume pane
Parity Group - LDEV tree
Displays the hierarchical structure of an array. For example, a disk group number (Box 1), parity group number (1-1), RAID level (RAID1(2D +2D)), and VDEV number (1-1-(1)) appear.
NOTE:
If a parity group number begins with E (for example, E1-1), the parity group consists of one or more external LUs.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
173
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with V (for example, V1-1), the parity group consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
The RAID level is left unspecified with a hyphen (-) when the LDEV is an external LU.
The following icons indicate parity group status.
Table 33 Parity group status icons
Icon Status
Parity group.
Set of parity groups that are concatenated into one. Each LDEV in this set of parity groups usually extends over more than one parity group.
The following icons indicate VDEV status.
Table 34 VDEV status icons
Icon Status
No pending CVS actions.
NOTE:
This icon appears immediately after you click Apply.
CVS actions have been stored, but not yet implemented on the array.
NOTE:
This icon appears before you click Apply.
Capacity Unit list
Used to select the unit for displaying the volume capacity: MB, Cyl, or block.
When you manipulate mainframe volumes, you can only select Cyl.
Parity Group - LDEV table
Displays information about logical volumes in the selected VDEV.
• No.: Volume number.
• CU:LDEV: Icon and CU:LDEV number. Free indicates a free space.
174
Custom Volume Size operations
NOTE:
When free spaces appear in the Parity Group - LDEV table, you can convert any of them into a customized volume (CV). To convert free spaces, right-click a free space, and select Install CV. For more information, see
Creating CVS volumes (Install CV operation) .
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:00V), the LDEV is a virtual volume. For more information about virtual volumes, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
The following icons indicate the LDEV’s status.
Table 35 LDEV status icons
Icon LDEV status
Normal LDEV
LUSE volume
LDEV reserved for Auto LUN XP
CVS volume
CVS volume reserved for Auto LUN XP
Free space
LDEV secured by Hitachi SANtinel - S/390®
Remote command device
• Emulation: Emulation type.
• Capacity: Volume’s capacity displayed in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list.
• Paths: Number of LU paths. Blank indicates no LU paths.
• Access Attribute: Volume’s access attribute.
• Status: Volume’s status. You must click LDEV Status to display the volume’s status.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
175
Table 36 Volume status
Status Description
Normal
Blocked
Warning
Format
Volume is in a normal status.
Volume is in a blocked status. Hosts cannot access the blocked volume.
Volume has a problem.
Volume is being formatted.
Correction Access Volume’s access attribute is being changed.
Copying
Volume’s data is being copied.
Read Only Hosts can only read the volume. Hosts cannot write data to a volume in Read
Only status.
Shredding
Unknown
Shredding operation is in progress.
System does not recognize the volume’s status.
• Attribute: Volume’s attribute.
Table 37 Volume attributes
Attribute
Description
Pool (pool-id) Volume is a pool volume (pool-VOL). The pool ID is enclosed by parentheses.
JNL Volume Volume is a journal volume.
Progress bar
Displays the operation’s progress.
Buttons
• LDEV Status: Displays the current volume status.
• Shredding Param: Displays the Shredding Param (Parameter) pane. You can define shredding settings in the Shredding Param pane.
• Download: Downloads the file downloads the file that contains the results of shredding operations that have been performed so far.
• Apply: Implements settings made in this pane.
• Cancel: Cancels settings made in this pane.
Volume to Space Confirmation pane
This pane appears before the Volume to Space function starts. Confirm the volumes you want to initialize to spaces.
NOTE:
An error occurs if volumes selected as targets of the Volume to Space function include a volume that cannot be processed by the Volume to Space function (see
176
Custom Volume Size operations
Figure 91 Volume to Space Confirmation pane
• VDEV information table: Displays information about volumes that will be converted to space areas.
• VDEV: Set of a disk group, parity group, and VDEV number.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the parity group consists of one or more external LUs.
• CU:LDEV: CU and LDEV numbers.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
• Emulation: LDEV’s emulation type.
• Capacity: Volume capacity in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list in the Customized
Volume pane (
• OK: Registers information about volumes in the setting list as data for the Volume to Space operation.
• Cancel: Cancels the Volume to Space operation.
Install CV pane (1)
Use this pane to define and install one or more CVS volumes under an existing volume. You can specify the emulation type and capacity of the CVS volume you want to create.
NOTE:
Different panes are used for OPEN-V and other emulation types (see
Install CV pane (1) for OPEN-V
and
Install CV pane (1) for other than OPEN-V ).
Install CV pane (1) for OPEN-V
shows the first Install CV pane that appears when the selected emulation type is OPEN-V.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
177
Figure 92 Install CV pane (1) for OPEN-V
The Install CV pane (1) has the following features:
• Parity Group: Selected free space’s VDEV number. The VDEV number indicates the parity group where the VDEV belongs. For example, if VDEV number 1-1-(1) appears, the VDEV belongs to parity group number 1-1.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• Emulation: CVS volume’s emulation type (OPEN-V).
• LDEV information table: Displays the following information about the CVS volume settings:
• No.: CVS volume’s setting number.
• Emulation: CVS volume’s emulation type (OPEN-V).
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity displayed in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list.
• available LDEVs: Number of LDEVs that can be created in the VDEV. The maximum is 512 LDEVs for RAID5 (7D+1P) or RAID6 (6D+2P), and 256 LDEVs for other RAID levels.
• Capacity Unit: Unit the CVS volume’s capacity is displayed in.
• MB: Megabytes (MB). This unit is used for specifying the capacity of open-system volumes.
• Cyl: Cylinders (Cyl). This unit is used for specifying the capacity of mainframe volumes.
NOTE:
This unit can also be used for specifying the capacity of OPEN-V volumes.
178
Custom Volume Size operations
• Block: Blocks. This unit is used for specifying the capacity of external LUs. For more information about external LUs, see the HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide.
• Specify capacity and number: Capacity and number of CVs in the CVS volume you want to create.
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity in the unit selected in the Capacity Unit list. The available capacity range (minimum - maximum) is shown on the right (for example, 46 - 6720 MB,
50 - 7168 Cyl, or 315 - 8513 blocks). The value can be incremented by 1 MB, cylinder, or block.
• Number: Number of volumes of that size. The available range is shown on the right (for example, 1 - 489).
• Divide free space by number: Used to create CVS volumes by specifying the number of CVs in the CVS volume to be created.
• Number: Number of CVs in the CVS volume. If you select this option, the available range is shown on the right (for example, 1 - 47).
• Divide free space by capacity: Used to create CVS volumes by specifying the capacity of CVs in the CVS volume to be created.
• Capacity: Capacity of the CVS volumes to be created. The available capacity range
(minimum - maximum) is shown below Capacity (for example, 46 - 6720 MB, 50 - 7168 Cyl, or
315 - 8513 blocks).
• Set remaining space as volume: Used to create a CVS volume using the remaining space in the VDEV.
• Set: Displays the selected settings in the LDEV information table on the left.
• Delete: Deletes the settings for CVS volumes selected in the LDEV information table.
• Clear: Deletes all the settings in the LDEV information table.
• Next: Displays the Install CV pane (2).
• Cancel: Cancels the selected settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
Install CV pane (1) for other than OPEN-V
shows the Install CV pane (1) for emulation types other than OPEN-V.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
179
Figure 93 Install CV pane (1) for other than OPEN-V
This pane has the following features:
• Parity Group: Selected free space’s VDEV number.
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with E (for example, E1-1), the parity group consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• Emulation Type: Emulation type.
• Capacity Unit: Unit (MB, Cyl, or block) in which the volume capacity is displayed.
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity in the unit selected in the Capacity Unit list. The available capacity range (minimum - maximum) is shown on the right (for example, 46 - 6720 MB,
50 - 7168 Cyl, or 315 - 8513 blocks). The value can be incremented by 1 MB, cylinder, or block.
• Set: Displays the selected settings in the LDEV information table on the left.
• Delete: Deletes the settings for the CVS volumes selected in the LDEV information table.
• LDEV information table: Displays the following information about the CVS volume settings:
• No.: CVS volume’s setting number.
• Emulation: CVS volume’s emulation type.
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity displayed in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list.
• Available LDEVs: Number of LDEVs that can be created in the VDEV. The maximum is 512 LDEVs for RAID5 (7D+1P) or RAID6 (6D+2P), and 256 LDEVs for other RAID levels.
• Next: Displays the Install CV pane (2).
• Cancel: Cancels the selected settings and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
180
Custom Volume Size operations
Install CV pane (2)
This pane displays the CVS volumes to be created in the table on the top. You can specify the CVS volume’s CU and LDEV numbers.
Figure 94 Install CV pane (2)
This pane has the following features:
• CVS volume-setting information table: On the upper right of the pane, displays detailed information about the CVS volumes to be created.
• Parity Group: Number of the VDEV to which the CVS volume belongs. The VDEV number indicates the parity group where the VDEV belongs. For example, if the VDEV number 1-1-(1) appears, the VDEV belongs to parity group number 1-1.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• No.: CVS volume’s setting number.
• Emulation: CVS volume’s emulation type.
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity displayed in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list on the Install CV pane (1).
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
181
• CU:LDEV: CU and LDEV numbers for the CVS volume to be created. The default is blank.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
• Select LDEV No. area: Used to set LDEV numbers for the CVS volumes you are creating.
• Select CU No.: Select a CU number from the drop-down list. The default is CU 00. LDEV number settings for the selected CU number appear in the Select LDEV No. table.
• Interval: When selecting more than one volume, use this list to set the interval between the
LDEV numbers to be assigned to the newly created volumes. The default value is 0. When you select 0, consecutive LDEV numbers are assigned.
NOTE:
The value you specify as the interval between LDEV numbers counts only available LDEV numbers and skips those that are not selectable.
• Select LDEV No. table: Displays LDEV numbers for the CU number selected from the Select
CU No. list. Gray indicates LDEV numbers that are not selectable, white indicates unused
LDEV numbers, and blue indicates available LDEV numbers. You can select an LDEV number from the white LDEV numbers in the table. When you set the LDEV number, that LDEV number becomes available and changes to blue.
NOTE:
LDEV numbers that are not selectable might already be in use or assigned to another emulation group (grouped by 32 LDEV numbers) (see
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
Table 38 Emulation groups
Emulation group D-type (overseas PCM) emulation type
Group 1 3390-3, 3390-3A, 3390-3B, 3390-3C, 3390-9, 3390-9A, 3390-9B, 3390-9C,
3390-L, 3390-LA, 3390-LB, 3390-LC, 3390-M, 3390-MA, 3390-MB, 3390-MC
Group 2
Group 4
Group 6
3390-3R
OPEN-3, OPEN-8, OPEN-9, OPEN-E
OPEN-V
• CU number of another SLPR is used: When selected, you can select the number of an LDEV that does not exist in the SLPR to which the parity group does not belong. When cleared, you can only select the number of the LDEV in the SLPR to which the parity group belongs.
NOTE:
The CU number of another SLPR is used check box appears only when you log in as a storage administrator and when there are two or more SLPRs.
• Back: Returns to Install CV pane (1).
• Next: Opens one of the following panes:
182
Custom Volume Size operations
• If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID, the Install CV pane
(3) for setting an SSID appears.
• If the selected LDEV’s boundary area has an SSID, the Install CV pane (4) appears.
• Cancel: Cancels the LDEV’s settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
• Clear: Removes a CU:LDEV number that is already assigned. To remove a CU:LDEV number, right-click the CVS volume number corresponding to the CU:LDEV number you want to remove, and select Clear.
Install CV pane (3)
This pane appears when you create CVS volumes if the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID. You can set an SSID on the Install CV pane (3).
Figure 95 Install CV pane (3) for setting SSIDs
This pane has the following features:
• Set SSID tree: Displays a hierarchical structure of SSID setting information containing CU numbers
(for example, CU 00), SSID boundary areas (for example, 00-3F), and SSIDs (for example,
0004). When the selected LDEV number’s SSID boundary area has no SSID, the following icons appear before the related CU number and LDEV boundary area. The SSID of a boundary area having no SSID is ----.
Table 39 Set SSID tree icons (Install CV)
Icon Description
CU number is not extracted.
CU number is extracted.
LDEV boundary area.
• Set SSID table: Used to set the SSID boundary area.
• CU: CU number containing an LDEV boundary with no SSID.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
183
• LDEV Boundary: Boundary area of an LDEV number with no SSID.
• SSID: Specified SSID. The default is blank.
• Input SSID: Used to select or enter the desired SSID. You can enter the SSID only when you log in as a storage administrator.
• SSID number of another SLPR is used: When selected, you can select the number of an SSID that does not exist in the SLPR to which the parity group does not belong. When cleared, you can only select the number of an SSID in the SLPR to which the parity group belongs.
NOTE:
The SSID number of another SLPR is used check box appears only when you log in as a storage administrator and when there are two or more SLPRs.
NOTE:
You cannot enter a number in the Input SSID list when the SSID number of another SLPR is used check box is cleared.
• Set: Sets the SSID you select or enter in the Input SSID list to the table. The Set SSID table displays the new SSID.
• Back: Returns to Install CV pane (2).
• Next: Opens the Install CV pane (4) (confirmation pane).
• Cancel: Cancels the SSID setting, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
Install CV pane (4)
Use this pane to confirm the settings of the CVS volumes to be created.
Figure 96 Install CV pane (4) for confirming Install CV settings
• CVS volume setting information table: Displays a list of CVS volumes to be created.
• VDEV: VDEV number for the CVS volume to be created.
184
Custom Volume Size operations
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• Emulation: Emulation type of the CVS volume to be created.
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity displayed in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list in the Install CV pane (1).
• CU:LDEV: CU:LDEV number of the CVS volume to be created.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:00V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about virtual volumes, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
• Back: Returns to the Install CV pane (2) or Install CV pane (3).
• OK: Registers the Install CV settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
• Cancel: Cancels the Install CV settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
Make Volume pane
Make Volume pane (1) for OPEN-V
shows the first Make Volume pane that appears when the selected emulation type is OPEN-V.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
185
Figure 97 Make Volume pane (1) for OPEN-V
This pane has the following features:
• Parity Group: VDEV number of the CVS volume to be initialized. The VDEV number indicates the parity group where the VDEV belongs. For example, if VDEV number 1-1-(1) appears, the
VDEV belongs to parity group number 1-1.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• Emulation: CVS volume’s emulation type (OPEN-V).
• LDEV information table: Displays the following information about the CVS volume settings:
• No.: CVS volume’s setting number.
• Emulation: CVS volume’s emulation type (OPEN-V).
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity displayed in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list.
• available LDEVs: Number of LDEVs that can be created in the VDEV. The maximum is 512
LDEVs for RAID5 (7D+1P), and 256 LDEVs for other RAID levels.
• Capacity Unit: Unit the CVS volume’s capacity is displayed in.
• MB: Megabytes (MB). This unit is used for specifying the capacity of open-system volumes.
• Cyl: Cylinders (Cyl). This unit is used for specifying the capacity of mainframe volumes.
NOTE:
This unit can also be used for specifying the capacity of OPEN-V volumes.
• Block: Blocks. This unit is used for specifying the capacity of external LUs. For more information about external LUs, see the HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide.
186
Custom Volume Size operations
• Specify capacity and number: Used to specify the capacity and the number of CVs in the CVS volume you want to create.
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity in the unit selected in the Capacity Unit list. The available capacity range (minimum - maximum) is shown below Capacity Unit (for example,
46 - 6720 MB, 50 - 7168 Cyl, or 315 - 8513 blocks).
• Number: Number of volumes of that size. The available range is shown on the right to the box (for example, 1 - 489).
• Divide free space by number: Used to create CVS volumes by specifying the number of CVs in the CVS volume to be created.
• Number: Number of CVs in the CVS volume. If you select this option, the available range is shown on the right to the box (for example, 1 - 47).
• Divide free space by capacity: Used to create CVS volumes by specifying the capacity of CVs in the CVS volume to be created.
• Capacity: Capacity of the CVS volumes to be created. The available capacity range
(minimum - maximum) is shown below Capacity (for example, 46 - 6720 MB, 50 - 7168 Cyl, or 315 - 8513 blocks).
• Set remaining space as volume: Used to create a CVS volume using the remaining space in the VDEV.
NOTE:
This option is greyed out when there are two or more free spaces in the VDEV.
• Set: Displays the selected settings in the LDEV information table on the left.
• Delete: Deletes the settings from a the CVS volume selected in the LDEV information table.
• Clear: Deletes all the settings in the LDEV information table.
• Next: Opens the Make Volume pane (2). When no CV is set, no volume is made in the VDEV by the Make Volume operation. In this case, this button displays a message, and returns to the
Customized Volume pane.
• Cancel: Cancels the selected settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
Make Volume Pane (1) for other than OPEN-V
shows the Make Volume pane (1) for emulation types other than OPEN-V.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
187
Figure 98 Make Volume pane (1) for other than OPEN-V
This pane has the following features:
• Parity Group: Selected free space’s VDEV number. The VDEV number indicates the parity group where the VDEV belongs. For example, if VDEV number 1-1-(1) appears, the VDEV belongs to parity group number 1-1.
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with E (for example, E1-1), the parity group consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• Emulation Type: Emulation type.
• Capacity Unit: Unit (MB, Cyl, or block) used to display the volume capacity.
• Capacity: Capacity of the CVS volume in the unit selected in the Capacity Unit list. The available capacity range (minimum - maximum) is shown on the right (for example, 46 - 6720 MB,
50 - 7168 Cyl, or 315 - 8513 blocks). The value can be incremented by 1 MB, cylinder, or block.
• Set: Displays the selected settings in the LDEV information table on the left.
• Delete: Deletes the settings of CVS volumes selected in the LDEV information table.
• LDEV information table: Displays the following information about the CVS volume settings:
• No.: CVS volume’s setting number.
• Emulation: CVS volume’s emulation type.
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity displayed in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list.
• Available LDEVs: Number of LDEVs that can be created in the VDEV. The maximum is 512 LDEVs for RAID5 (7D+1P), and 256 LDEVs for other RAID levels.
•
Next: Displays the Make Volume pane (2). When no CV is set, no volume is made in the VDEV by the Make Volume operation. In this case, this button displays a message, and returns to the
Customized Volume pane.
188
Custom Volume Size operations
• Cancel: Cancels the selected settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
Make Volume pane (2)
Use this pane to assign CU and LDEV numbers for the CVS volumes to be created.
Figure 99 Make Volume pane (2)
This pane has the following features:
• CVS volume-setting information table: On the upper right of the pane, displays detailed information about the CVS volumes to be created.
• Parity Group: Number of the VDEV to be initialized. The VDEV number indicates the parity group where the VDEV belongs. For example, if VDEV number 1-1-(1) appears, the VDEV belongs to parity group number 1-1.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• No.: CVS volume’s setting number.
• Emulation: CVS volume’s emulation type.
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity displayed in the capacity unit selected from the Capacity
Unit list on the Make Volume pane (1).
• CU:LDEV: CU and LDEV numbers for the CVS volume to be created. The default is blank.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
189
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:00V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about virtual volumes, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
• Select LDEV No. area: Used to set LDEV numbers for the CVS volumes you are creating.
• Select CU No.: CU number. The default is CU 00. The settings of LDEV numbers for the selected CU number appear in the Select LDEV No. table.
• Interval: When you select more than one volume, used to set the interval between the LDEV numbers that need to be assigned to the newly created volumes. The default value is 0. When you select 0, consecutive LDEV numbers are assigned.
NOTE:
The value you specify as the interval between LDEV numbers counts only available LDEV numbers and skips those that are not selectable.
• Select LDEV No. table: Displays the settings of LDEV numbers for the CU number selected from the Select CU No. list. Gray indicates the LDEV numbers that are not selectable, white indicates unused LDEV numbers, and blue indicates available LDEV numbers. You can select an LDEV number from the white LDEV numbers in the table. When you set the LDEV number, that LDEV number becomes available and changes to blue.
NOTE:
LDEV numbers that are not selectable may be already in use or already assigned to another emulation group (grouped by 32 LDEV numbers) (see
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:00V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about virtual volumes, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
• CU number of another SLPR is used: When selected, you can select the number of an LDEV that does not exist in the SLPR to which the parity group does not belong. When cleared, you can only select the number of an LDEV in the SLPR to which the parity group belongs.
NOTE:
The CU number of another SLPR is used check box appears only when you log in as a storage administrator and when there are two or more SLPRs.
• Back: Returns to Make Volume pane (1).
• Next: Opens one of the following panes:
190
Custom Volume Size operations
• If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID, the Make Volume pane
(3) for setting an SSID appears.
• If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area has an SSID, the Make Volume pane (4) appears.
• Cancel: Cancels the settings for the LDEV, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
• Clear: Removes a CU:LDEV number that is already assigned. To remove a CU:LDEV number, right-click a CVS volume number corresponding to the CU:LDEV number you want to remove, and select Clear.
Make Volume pane (3)
This pane appears when you create CVS volumes if the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID. You can set an SSID on the Make Volume pane (3).
Figure 100 Make Volume pane (3) for setting SSIDs
This pane has the following features:
• Set SSID information tree: Displays a hierarchical structure of SSID setting information that contains CU numbers (for example, CU 00), SSID boundary areas (for example, 00-3F), and SSID
(for example, 0004). When the selected LDEV number’s SSID boundary area has no SSID, the following icon appears before the related CU number and the related LDEV boundary area. The
SSID of the boundary area having no SSID is ----.
Table 40 Set SSID tree icons (Make Volume)
Icon Description
CU number is not extracted.
CU number is extracted.
LDEV boundary area.
• Set SSID table: Used set the SSID boundary area.
• CU: CU number containing an LDEV boundary with no SSID.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
191
• LDEV Boundary: Boundary area of an LDEV number with no SSID.
• SSID: Specified SSID. The default is blank.
• Input SSID: Used to select or enter the SSID. You can enter the SSID only when you log in as a storage administrator.
• SSID number of another SLPR is used: When selected, you can select the number of an SSID that does not exist in the SLPR to which the parity group does not belong. When cleared, you can select only the number of an SSID in the SLPR to which the parity group belongs.
NOTE:
The SSID number of another SLPR is used check box appears only when you log in as a storage administrator and when there are two or more SLPRs.
NOTE:
You cannot enter the number in the Input SSID list when the SSID number of another SLPR is used check box is cleared.
• Set: Sets the SSID you select or enter in Input SSID list to the table. The Set SSID table displays the new SSID.
• Back: Cancels the SSID setting, and returns to the Make Volume pane (2).
• Next: Displays the Make Volume pane (4) (confirmation pane).
• Cancel: Returns to the Customized Volume pane.
Make Volume pane (4)
Use this pane to confirm the settings of the CVS volumes to be created.
Figure 101 Make Volume pane (4) for confirming Make Volume settings
This pane has the following features:
• CVS volume-setting information table: Displays a list of CVS volumes to be created.
• VDEV: VDEV number for the CVS volume to be created. The VDEV number indicates the parity group where the VDEV belongs. For example, if VDEV number 1-1-(1) appears, the
VDEV belongs to parity group number 1-1.
192
Custom Volume Size operations
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• Emulation: Emulation type of the CVS volume to be created (OPEN-V).
• Capacity: CVS volume’s capacity displayed in the unit selected from the Capacity Unit list in the Make Volume pane (1).
• CU:LDEV: CU:LDEV number of the CVS volume to be created.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:00V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about virtual volumes, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
• Back: Returns to the Make Volume pane (2) or Make Volume pane (3).
• OK: Registers the Make Volume settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
• Cancel: Cancels the Make Volume settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
Volume Initialize pane (1)
Use this pane to initialize CVS volumes other than OPEN-V.
Figure 102 Volume Initialize pane (1)
This pane has the following features:
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
193
• Normal volume-setting information table: On the upper right of the pane, displays detailed information about the CVS volumes to be initialized.
• Parity Group: Number of the VDEV to be initialized. The VDEV number indicates the parity group where the VDEV belongs. For example, if VDEV number 1-1-(1) appears, the VDEV belongs to parity group number 1-1.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• No.: Setting number of the CVS volume to be initialized.
• Emulation: Emulation type of the CVS volume to be initialized.
• Capacity: Capacity of the CVS volume to be initialized in either MB for open-system volumes or cylinders (Cyl) for mainframe volumes.
• CU:LDEV: CU and LDEV numbers for the CVS volume to be initialized. The default is blank.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
• Select LDEV No. area: Used to set LDEV numbers for the CVS volume to be initialized.
• Select CU No.: CU number. The default is CU 00. The LDEV number settings for the selected
CU number appear in the Select LDEV No. table.
• Interval: When selecting more than one volume, used to set the interval between the LDEV numbers to be assigned to the newly created volumes. The default value is 0. When you select
0, consecutive LDEV numbers are assigned.
NOTE:
The value you specify as the interval between LDEV numbers counts only available LDEV numbers and skips those that are not selectable.
• Select LDEV No. table: Displays the LDEV number settings for the CU number selected in
Select CU No. Gray indicates LDEV numbers that are not selectable, white indicates unused
LDEV numbers, and blue indicates available LDEV numbers. You can select an LDEV number from the white LDEV numbers in the table. When you set the LDEV number, that LDEV number becomes available and changes to blue.
NOTE:
LDEV numbers that are not selectable may be already in use or already assigned to the other emulation group (grouped by 32 LDEV numbers) (see
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
194
Custom Volume Size operations
• CU number of another SLPR is used: When selected, you can select the number of an LDEV that does not exist in the SLPR to which the parity group does not belong. When cleared, you can only select the number of an LDEV in the SLPR to which the parity group belongs.
NOTE:
The CU number of another SLPR is used check box appears only when you log in as a storage administrator and when there are two or more SLPRs.
• Next: Opens one of the following panes:
• If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID, the Volume Initialize pane (2) for setting an SSID appears.
• If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area has an SSID, the Volume Initialize pane (3) appears.
• Cancel: Cancels the settings for the LDEV, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
• Clear: Removes a CU:LDEV number that is already assigned. To remove a CU:LDEV number, right-click a CVS volume number corresponding to the CU:LDEV number you want to remove, and select Clear.
Volume Initialize pane (2)
This pane appears during the initialization of CVS volumes if the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID. You can set an SSID on the Volume Initialize pane (2).
Figure 103 Volume Initialize pane (2) for setting SSIDs
This pane has the following features:
• Set SSID tree: Displays a hierarchical structure of SSID setting information containing CU numbers
(for example, CU 00), SSID boundary areas (for example, 00-3F), and SSID (for example, 0004).
When a selected LDEV number’s SSID boundary area has no SSID, the following icon appears before the related CU number and LDEV boundary area. The SSID of a boundary area having no SSID is ----.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
195
Table 41 Set SSID tree icons (Volume Initialize)
Icon Description
CU number is not extracted.
CU number is extracted.
LDEV boundary area.
• Set SSID table: Used to set the SSID boundary area.
• CU: CU number containing an LDEV boundary with no SSID.
• LDEV Boundary: Boundary area of an LDEV number with no SSID.
• SSID: Specified SSID. The default is blank.
• Input SSID: Used to select or enter the SSID. You can enter the SSID only when you log in as a storage administrator.
• SSID number of another SLPR is used: When selected, you can select the number of an SSID that does not exist in the SLPR to which the parity group does not belong. When cleared, you can select only the number of the SSID in the SLPR to which the parity group belongs.
NOTE:
The SSID number of another SLPR is used check box appears only when you log in as a storage administrator and when there are two or more SLPRs.
NOTE:
You cannot enter the number in the Input SSID list when the SSID number of another SLPR is used check box is cleared.
• Set: Sets the SSID you select or enter in the Input SSID list to the Set SSID table. The Set SSID table displays the new SSID.
• Back: Cancels the SSID setting, and returns to the Volume Initialize pane (1).
• Next: Opens the Volume Initialize pane (3) (confirmation pane).
• Cancel: Returns to the Customized Volume pane.
Volume Initialize pane (3)
Use this pane to confirm the settings of the CVS volumes to be initialized.
196
Custom Volume Size operations
Figure 104 Volume Initialize pane (3) for confirming Volume Initialize settings
This pane has the following features:
• CVS volume-setting information table: Displays a list of the CVS volumes to be initialized.
• VDEV: VDEV number for the CVS volume to be initialized.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with E (for example, E1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• Emulation: Emulation type of the CVS volume to be initialized.
• Capacity: Capacity of the CVS volume to be initialized, either in MB for open-system volumes or cylinders (Cyl) for mainframe volumes.
• CU:LDEV: CU:LDEV number of the CVS volume to be initialized.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with V (for example, 00:00V), the LDEV is a virtual volume (V-VOL). For more information about virtual volumes, see the
HP StorageWorks Snapshot XP user guide
.
•
Back: Returns to the Volume Initialize pane (1) or Volume Initialize pane (2).
• OK: Registers the Volume Initialize settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
• Cancel: Cancels the Volume Initialize settings, and returns to the Customized Volume pane.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
197
Concatenation List pane
In the array, data can be written to an LDEV that extends over concatenated parity groups. Concatenation of parity groups enables faster access to data. The Concatenation List pane displays concatenated parity groups.
Figure 105 Concatenation List pane
• Parity Group: Displays concatenated parity groups.
NOTE:
If a parity group number starts with E (for example, E1-1), the parity group consists of one or more external LUs.
NOTE:
If a VDEV number starts with V (for example, V1-1-(1)), the VDEV belongs to a parity group that consists of one or more virtual volumes (V-VOLs).
• OK: Closes the Concatenation List pane.
Format All pane
Use this pane to format all blocked volumes in parity groups in the local and/or external array.
CAUTION:
You cannot format virtual volumes.
198
Custom Volume Size operations
Figure 106 Format All pane
• Parity Group Type: Used to specify volumes to be formatted.
• All Type: Blocked volumes in all parity groups in the local and external arrays are formatted.
• Internal PG: Blocked volumes in all parity groups in the local array are formatted.
• External PG: Blocked volumes in all parity groups in the external array are formatted.
• List: Displays information about volumes to be formatted.
• PG: Parity groups containing the volumes to be formatted.
• Blocked Count: Number of blocked volumes to be formatted.
• OK: Applies the Format All pane settings to the Customized Volume pane, and closes the Format
All pane.
NOTE:
After you click OK, the tree in the Customized Volume pane displays VDEVs immediately below parity groups containing volumes to be formatted.
• Cancel: Cancels the settings, and closes the Format All pane.
Write to Control Blocks pane
Use this pane to make external mainframe volumes usable. This pane overwrites control blocks in external
LU in the specified external LU group. Control blocks contain information used for managing volumes.
CAUTION:
Operations in this pane must be performed only on external LUs with data areas that are zero-formatted.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
199
Figure 107 Write to Control Blocks pane
• Target ExG: External LU groups containing volumes to be made usable.
• ExG: External LU group numbers.
• External Storage: Information about external arrays.
• Add: Moves external LU groups selected in the Candidate ExG list to the Target ExG list.
• Delete: Moves external LU groups selected in the Target ExG list to the Candidate ExG list.
• Candidate ExG: List of external LU groups.
• ExG: External LU group numbers.
• External Storage: Information about external arrays.
• OK: Applies settings in the Write to Control Blocks pane to the Volume Manager pane, and closes the Write to Control Blocks pane.
• Cancel: Cancels settings in the Write to Control Blocks pane, and closes the pane.
Performing Custom Volume Size operations
This section describes procedures for performing Custom Volume Size (CVS) operations.
Before starting CVS operations
Before starting a CVS operation on a selected array, ensure that mainframe volumes are disconnected from the host, and remove LU paths to the open volumes. For instructions, see
CVS operations
You must have write permission for CVS operations, and must be in Modify mode. For more information about assigning user access, see the HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
Viewing current CVS configuration information
You can view current CVS configuration information on the Customized Volume pane.
200
Custom Volume Size operations
• Viewing VDEV and LDEV configuration information
You can view configuration information for VDEVs and LDEVs on the Customized Volume pane (
90 ). This pane shows an outline of group numbers, parity group numbers, RAID levels, and VDEV
numbers and a table of CU:LDEV numbers, emulation types, LDEV capacities, and path settings of
VDEVs selected in the tree.
• Viewing LDEV number setting information
You can view setting information for LDEV numbers for a CU number in a selected parity group on
the Install CV pane (2) ( Figure 94
), Make Volume pane (2) (
Figure 99 ), and Volume Initialize pane
In the table, gray indicates LDEV numbers that are already in use, white indicates unused LDEV numbers, and blue indicates available LDEV numbers.
Viewing concatenated parity groups
1.
From the Customized Volume pane, right-click a set of parity groups ( ) from the Parity Group -
LDEV tree. If there are concatenated parity groups, a shortcut menu appears.
NOTE:
If you select a parity group icon that does not indicate concatenated parity groups ( ), the shortcut menu does not appear.
2.
Select Concatenation List. The Concatenation List dialog box appears.
3.
Click OK.
Converting logical volumes to space
CAUTION:
The Volume to Space function is a destructive operation. Data on the logical volumes being converted is lost when the operation is complete. You are responsible for backing up data as needed before performing this operation.
Use the Volume to Space function to convert one or more logical volumes (LDEVs) to space, which deletes the selected LDEVs from that VDEV. In other words, the Volume to Space function converts one or more selected LDEVs (FVs or CVs) in a VDEV into spaces. For more information, see
1.
On the upper right of the XP Remote Web Console main pane, select a CU group from the drop-down list.
2.
From the Customized Volume pane, select the LDEV folder in the Parity Group - LDEV tree to open a list of VDEVs.
3.
In the LDEV Information table, select a VDEV to display detailed information about the LDEVs of the selected VDEV.
4.
From the CU:LDEV list, select one or more LDEVs.
NOTE:
For the OPEN-V emulation type, you can also convert LUSE volumes into free space. If the available LDEV is a LUSE volume, the emulation type appears with an asterisk and the number of volumes in the LUSE volume (for example, OPEN-V*3) in the Emulation column of the table.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
201
NOTE:
To select two or more adjacent LDEVs, select the LDEVs while pressing the Shift key. To select two or more discrete LDEVs, select the LDEVs while pressing the Ctrl key.
5.
Right-click the selected LDEVs, and select Volume to Space. The Volume to Space Confirmation dialog box appears.
6.
If the listed volumes are correct, click OK.
The change is not yet implemented in the array, but the following changes appear on the Customized
Volume pane:
• Selected LDEVs are listed as Free.
• Figures in the Capacity column are not yet updated
• The color of the VDEV icon you manipulated in the Parity Group - LDEV tree changes from red to blue. You cannot manipulate blue VDEVs until you click Apply or Cancel, but you can perform additional Volume to Space operations on VDEVs with red icons.
7.
Click Apply (or Cancel).
8.
Click OK (or Cancel).
NOTE:
A notation appears across the bottom of the pane indicating the change is in process (for example, LDEVs >> Free Spaces and Array is Refreshing) or the operation is complete
(for example, Complete).
Creating CVS volumes (Install CV operation)
Use the Install CV function to define and install one or more CVS volumes (CVs) in spaces created with the Volume to Space operation or define and install one or more CVS volumes (CVs) in free spaces created as a result of creating volumes in VDEVs.
NOTE:
The Install CV function allocates CVS volumes in the order in which the function finds sufficient free space for the CVS volumes. For optimum space allocation, allocate CVS volumes in descending order of capacity.
1.
On the upper right of the XP Remote Web Console main pane, select a CU group from the drop-down list.
2.
From the Customized Volume pane, select the LDEV folder in the Parity Group - LDEV tree to display a list of Control Units. From the LDEV Information table, select a VDEV to display detailed information about LDEVs in the selected VDEV.
3.
Right-click any part of the Parity Group - LDEV tree, and select Install CV.
If the selected VDEV is an OPEN-V volume, the Install CV pane (1) for OPEN-V appears (
If the selected VDEV is a volume other than OPEN-V, the Install CV pane (1) for other than OPEN-V
). Go to step 5.
4.
From the Install CV pane (1) for OPEN-V, do the following:
a. In the Capacity Unit list, select the capacity unit for the selected volume from the following options: MB, Cyl, or block.
b. Select one of the following CVS volume creation methods:
202
Custom Volume Size operations
• Specify capacity and number
• Divide free space by number
• Divide free space by capacity
• Set remaining space as volume.
NOTE:
If there are two or more free spaces in the VDEV, Divide free space by number, Divide free space by capacity, and Set remaining space as volume are not available.
c. Specify the CVS volume’s capacity or the number of CVs according to the selected method. For example:
• If you select Specify capacity and number, enter the capacity (either in MB, Cyl, or blocks) selected in the Capacity Unit list and the number of CVs in Capacity and
Number, respectively.
• If you select Divide free space by number, enter the number of CVs in the Number box.
• If you select Divide free space by capacity, enter the capacity in the Capacity box.
• If you select Set remaining space as volume, go to step 6.
NOTE:
The Install CV function allocates CVS volumes in the order in which the function finds sufficient free space for the CVS volumes. For optimum space allocation, allocate CVS volumes in descending order of capacity.
d. Click Set to display the setting in the LDEV Information table. To remove CVS volume settings displayed in the LDEV Information table, do the following:
• To remove a setting, select the CVS volume, and click Delete. When a confirmation message appears, click OK.
• To remove all settings, click Clear. When a confirmation message appears, click OK.
e. To create other CVS volumes, repeat step 4a through step 4d. After setting all CVS volumes, go to step 6.
5.
From the Install CV pane (1) for other than OPEN-V, do the following:
a. In the Emulation Type list, select the emulation type.
b. In the Capacity box, enter the capacity of the CVS volume you want to create, either in MB or blocks for open systems or in cylinders (Cyl) for mainframe volumes. The available capacity range (minimum - maximum) appears on the right of the Capacity box. The value can be incremented by 1 MB or block for open systems or by 1 Cyl for mainframe systems.
NOTE:
The Install CV function allocates CVS volumes in the order in which the function finds sufficient free space for the CVS volumes. For optimum space allocation, allocate CVS volumes in descending order of capacity.
c. Click Set to display the setting in the LDEV Information table. To remove CVS volume settings displayed in the LDEV Information table, do the following:
• To remove a setting, select the CVS volume, and click Delete. When a confirmation message appears, click OK.
• To remove all settings, click Clear. When a confirmation message appears, click OK.
d. To create other CVS volumes, repeat step 5a through step 5c. After setting all CVS volumes, go to step 6.
6.
Click Next. The Install CV pane (2) appears.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
203
7.
Select one or more CVS volume numbers to assign CU and LDEV numbers.
8.
In the Select CU No. list, select a CU number.
9.
In the Select LDEV No. table, select an LDEV number from the white LDEV numbers. Gray indicates
LDEV numbers that are not selectable, white indicates unused LDEV numbers, and blue indicates available LDEV numbers. The CU and LDEV numbers appear in the CU:LDEV field of the CVS volume-setting information table.
NOTE:
You cannot specify an LDEV number if free LDEV numbers in LUSE configuration are not available in the selected CU.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
10.
To set other CVS volumes, repeat step 7 through step 9. To remove a CU:LDEV number that is already assigned, select one or more CVS volume numbers corresponding to the CU:LDEV numbers you want to remove, right-click, and select Clear.
11.
After setting all CU and LDEV numbers, click Next. If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID, the SSID setting pane appears. Go to step 12. If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area has an SSID, go to step 16.
12.
On the SSID setting pane, select the CU number.
13.
In the Input SSID list, select a new SSID.
NOTE:
When you log in as a storage administrator and the SSID number of another SLPR is used check box is selected, you can also enter an SSID in the Input SSID list.
14.
Click Set. The SSID appears in the SSID box of the SSID setting area.
15.
To set two or more SSIDs, repeat step 12 through step 14.
16.
After setting all SSIDs, click Next. The Install CV confirmation dialog box appears.
17.
Verify that the information displayed in the Install CV confirmation dialog box is correct, and click OK.
New settings appear in blue bold italics in the LDEV Information table on the Customized Volume pane.
NOTE:
Setting changes are not yet implemented in the array. You cannot manipulate blue VDEVs until you click Apply to apply the changes to the array or Cancel to cancel them, but you can install additional CVs in VDEVs with red icons.
18.
To apply the changes to the array, click Apply (or Cancel to cancel them).
19.
Click OK.
NOTE:
When the Install CV operation starts, a notation appears across the bottom of the pane indicating the progress and completion at the end of operation.
204
Custom Volume Size operations
Deleting CVS volumes
To delete an individual CVS volume within a VDEV, use the Volume to Space operation (see
Converting logical volumes to space ).
Converting CVs back to FVs (Volume Initialize operation)
CAUTION:
The Volume Initialize function is a destructive operation. Data on the CVS volume being converted is lost when the operation is complete. You are responsible for backing up data as needed before performing this operation.
Use the Volume Initialize function to convert a CVS volume back to a fixed volume. This operation de-installs all variable-sized volumes under a CVS volume, and reformats the CVS volume as a normal
FV (fixed volume).
CAUTION:
An error message might appear if a Volume Initialize and Make Volume operation are performed concurrently. For this error message, the part code is 0003 and the error number is 1041. If this message appears, ensure that these operations are performed separately.
1.
On the upper right of the XP Remote Web Console main pane, select a CU group from the drop-down list.
2.
From the Customized Volume pane, select the LDEV folder on the Parity Group - LDEV tree to display a list of VDEVs, and select a VDEV. The LDEV Information table displays detailed information about the LDEVs.
NOTE:
If the selected VDEV contains one or more CVs that violate any restriction for the Volume
Initialize operations (see
Volume Manager guidelines ), you cannot perform Volume
Initialize operations. Remove all invalid CVs before performing Volume Initialize operation.
3.
Right-click any part of the Parity Group - LDEV tree, and select Volume Initialize. The Volume
Initialize pane (1) appears.
4.
On the Volume Initialize pane (1):
a. Select one or more CVS volume numbers.
b. In the Select CU No. list, select a CU number.
c. In the Select LDEV Number table, select an LDEV number from the white LDEV numbers. The CU and LDEV number appear in the CU:LDEV field.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU.
For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage
XP user guide
.
d. To change a CU:LDEV number that is already assigned, select one or more volume numbers corresponding to the CU:LDEV numbers you want to remove, right-click, and select Clear.
5.
After setting all CU and LDEV numbers, click Next.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
205
If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID, the SSID setting pane appears.
Go to step 8. If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area has an SSID, go to step 10.
6.
On the SSID setting pane, select the CU number.
7.
In the Input SSID list, select a new SSID.
NOTE:
When you log in as a storage administrator and the SSID number of another SLPR is used check box is selected, you can also enter an SSID in the Input SSID list.
8.
Click Set. The SSID appears in the SSID field of the SSID setting area.
9.
To set two or more SSIDs, repeat step 6 through step 8.
10.
After setting all SSIDs, click Next. The Volume Initialize confirmation pane appears.
11.
Verify that the information in the Volume Initialize confirmation pane is correct, and click OK.
A notation appears across the top of the pane indicating the volume has been initialized. The color of the VDEV icon you manipulated in the Parity Group - LDEV tree changes from red to blue.
NOTE:
Setting changes are not yet implemented in the array. You cannot manipulate VDEVs denoted by blue icons until you either apply the changes to the array or cancel them, but you can initialize additional CVS volumes in VDEVs denoted by red icons.
12.
To apply changes to the array, click Apply (or Cancel to cancel them).
NOTE:
If desired, you can make settings on the Make Volume function (see
after making settings on the Volume Initialize and Make Volume functions, settings on these functions are applied simultaneously to the array.
13.
Click OK.
NOTE:
When the Volume Initialize operation starts, a notation appears across the bottom of the pane indicating the progress and completion at the end of the operation.
Re-creating CVs after initializing the VDEV (Make Volume operation)
CAUTION:
The Make Volume function is a destructive operation. Data on the CVS volume being converted is lost when the operation is complete. You are responsible for backing up data as needed before performing this operation.
CAUTION:
An error message might appear if Volume Initialize and Make Volume operations are performed concurrently. For this error message, the part code is 0003 and the error number is 1041. If this message appears, ensure that these operations are performed separately.
206
Custom Volume Size operations
1.
On the upper right of the XP Remote Web Console main pane, select a CU group from the drop-down list.
2.
From the Customized Volume pane, select the LDEV folder in the Parity Group - LDEV tree to display a list of VDEVs, and select a VDEV for OPEN-V. The LDEV Information table displays detailed information about the LDEVs.
NOTE:
If the selected VDEV contains one or more CVs that violate any restriction for the Make
Volume function (see
Volume Initialize and Make Volume functions ), you cannot perform
the Make Volume operation. Remove all invalid CVs before performing the Make Volume operation.
3.
Right-click any part of the Parity Group - LDEV tree, and select Make Volume. If the selected VDEV is an OPEN-V volume, the Make Volume pane (1) for OPEN-V appears (
). Go to step 4. If the selected VDEV is a volume other than OPEN-V, the Make Volume CV pane (1) for other than
OPEN-V appears (
4.
On the Make Volume pane (1) for OPEN-V, do the following:
a. In the Capacity Unit list, select the capacity unit for the selected volume from the following options: MB, Cyl, or block.
b. Select one of the following CVS volume creation methods:
• Specify capacity and number
• Divide free space by number
• Divide free space by capacity
• Set remaining space as volume
NOTE:
If there are two or more free spaces in the VDEV, Divide free space by number, Divide free space by capacity, and Set remaining space as volume are not available.
c. Specify the CVS volume’s capacity and number of CVs according to the selected method. For example:
• If you select Specify capacity and number, enter the capacity, either in MB or Cyl, selected in the Capacity Unit list, and the number of CVs in the Capacity and Number boxes.
• If you select Divide free space by number, enter the number of CVs in the Number box.
• If you select Divide free space by capacity, enter the capacity in the Capacity box.
• If you select Set remaining space as volume, go to step 6.
d. Click Set to display the setting in the LDEV Information table. To remove CVS volume settings displayed in the LDEV Information table, do the following:
• To remove a setting, select the CVS volume, and click Delete. When a confirmation message appears, click OK.
• To remove all settings, click Clear. When a confirmation message appears, click OK.
e. To set other CVS volumes, repeat step 4a through step 4d. After setting all CVS volumes, go to step 6.
5.
On the Make Volume pane (1) for other than OPEN-V, do the following:
a. In the Emulation Type list, select the emulation type.
b. In the Capacity field, enter the capacity of the CVS volume you want to create, either in MB or block for open systems or in cylinders (Cyl) for mainframe volumes. The available capacity range (minimum - maximum) is shown on the right of the Capacity field. The value can be incremented by 1 MB or block for open systems or 1 Cyl for mainframe systems.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
207
c. Click Set to display the setting in the LDEV information table. To remove CVS volume settings displayed in the LDEV information table, do the following:
• To remove a setting, select the CVS volume, and click Delete. When a confirmation message appears, select OK.
• To remove all settings, click Clear. When a confirmation message displays, click OK.
d. To create other CVS volumes, repeat step 5a through step 5c. After setting all CVS volumes, go to step 6.
6.
Click Next. The Make Volume pane (2) appears.
7.
Select one or more CVS volume numbers to assign CU and LDEV numbers.
8.
In the Select CU No. list, select a CU number.
9.
In the Select LDEV No. table, select an LDEV number from the white LDEV numbers. Gray indicates
LDEV numbers that are not selectable, white indicates LDEV numbers, and blue indicates available
LDEV numbers. The CU and LDEV number appear in the CU:LDEV field of the CVS volume-setting information table.
NOTE:
You cannot specify an LDEV number if free LDEV numbers in the LUSE configuration are not available in either of the following CUs:
• The CU displayed in the Select CU No. list.
• A CU whose CU number is larger than the CU number displayed in the Select CU
No. list.
NOTE:
If an LDEV number ends with # (for example, 00:01#), the LDEV is an external LU. For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
10.
Repeat step 7 through step 9 to set other CVS volumes. To remove a CU:LDEV number that is already assigned, select one or more CVS volume numbers corresponding to the CU:LDEV numbers you want to remove, right-click, and select Clear.
11.
After setting all CU and LDEV numbers, click Next. If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area does not have an SSID, the SSID setting pane appears. Go to step 12. If the selected LDEV number’s boundary area has an SSID, go to step 17.
12.
On the SSID setting pane, select the CU number.
13.
In the Input SSID box, select a new SSID.
NOTE:
When you are logged in as a storage administrator and the SSID number of another SLPR is used check box is selected, you can also enter an SSID in the Input SSID list.
14.
Click Set. The SSID appears in the SSID box of the SSID setting area.
15.
To set two or more SSIDs, repeat step 12 through step 14.
16.
After setting all SSIDs, click Next. The Make Volume confirmation pane appears.
17.
Verify that the information is correct, and click OK.
The created CVS volumes appear in blue bold italic in the LDEV Information table on the Customized
Volume pane.
208
Custom Volume Size operations
NOTE:
Setting changes are not yet implemented in the array. You cannot manipulate VDEVs denoted by blue icons until you click Apply to apply the changes to the array or Cancel to cancel them, but you can initialize additional CVS volumes in VDEVs denoted by red icons.
18.
To apply changes to the array, click Apply (or Cancel to cancel them).
NOTE:
If desired, you can make settings on the Volume Initialize function (see
settings on the Make Volume and Volume Initialize functions, settings on these functions are applied simultaneously to the array.
19.
Click OK.
NOTE:
When the Make Volume operation starts, a notation appears across the bottom of the pane indicating the progress and completion at the end of the operation.
Formatting LDEVs
Use the LDEV Format feature to format volumes, including external LUs. To format volumes, ensure that the volumes are in blocked status, as explained in the following procedure.
NOTE:
For more information about external LUs, see the
HP StorageWorks External Storage XP user guide
.
NOTE:
You cannot format virtual volumes.
1.
On the upper right of the XP Remote Web Console main pane, select a CU group from the drop-down list.
2.
From the Customized Volume pane, click LDEV Status.
3.
Confirm that the current status of the desired volume (external mainframe volume) is Normal in the
Status column of the Parity Group - LDEV table.
4.
Right-click the selected volume, and select Blockade.
5.
Confirm that the status of the volume in the Status column of the LDEV Information table changed to
Blocked, and all of the volume’s information appears in blue bold italics.
6.
Click Apply. In the confirmation pane, click OK. The new setting is implemented into the array and a notification pane appears notifying you that the implementation is complete. Click OK.
7.
Confirm that the volume is Blocked in the Status column of the LDEV Information table on the
Customized Volume pane.
8.
To specify the blocked volumes you want to format, do one of the following:
• Right-click the volume with Blocked status in the LDEV Information table, and select Format.
• To format all blocked internal and external LUs, right-click LDEV at the top of the tree, and select Format All. In the Format All pane, select All Type from the Parity Group Type list.
Confirm that the list displays internal and external LUs to be formatted, and click OK.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
209
• To format all blocked internal LUs, right-click LDEV at the top of the tree, and select Format
All. In the Format All pane, select Internal PG from the Parity Group Type list. Confirm that the list displays internal LUs to be formatted, and click OK.
• To format all blocked external LUs, right-click LDEV at the top of the tree, and select Format
All. In the Format All pane, select External PG from the Parity Group Type list. Confirm that the list displays external LUs to be formatted, and click OK.
9.
Confirm that the status of the specified volumes in the Status column of the LDEV Information table on the Customized Volume pane changed to Format, and all of the volume’s information appears in bold blue italics.
10.
Click Apply. In the confirmation pane, click OK. The words Format in progress appear next to the
Progress Bar on the Customized Volume pane with the percentage of completion.
11.
When the percentage shown on the Progress Bar reaches 100%, a notification pane appears notifying you that the formatting is complete. Click OK.
12.
Confirm that the status of the volumes in the Status column of the LDEV Information table on the
Customized Volume pane is Normal.
Making external mainframe volumes usable
To use external LUs with the array, you must usually use External Storage XP to perform external LU mapping, and then use Volume Manager’s Format or Format All command to format the volumes (see
). However, when you format external mainframe volumes in this way, the formatting operation might take a long time.
Use the following procedure to make external mainframe volumes usable more quickly.
CAUTION:
Only storage administrators can perform the following operation. Storage partition administrators cannot perform this operation.
1.
Zero-format the external mainframe volumes.
NOTE:
The term “zero-formatting” refers to a formatting operation that writes the number 0 (zero) to the entire disk area. For more information about zero-formatting volumes, see the documentation for the mainframe system or external array you are using.
2.
Use External Storage XP to map the zero-formatted external LUs and register the volumes in an external LU group. For more information, see the HP StorageWorks External Storage XP Users Guide.
CAUTION:
Ensure that the external LU group does not include volumes that are not zero-formatted. If an external LU group includes volumes that are not zero-formatted, the volumes are blocked when you perform the operation described in step 3. Therefore, hosts cannot read from or write to the volumes. If you have not zero-formatted external LUs but you want to make the external LUs usable with the array, use CVS’s Format or Format All command.
3.
Use Volume Manager to specify the external LU group, and overwrite control blocks in the volumes in the specified external LU groups. After overwriting finishes, the external LUs are usable with the array.
NOTE:
Control blocks are a type of area in a volume that contains information other than user data. Information required for managing a volume is recorded in control blocks.
210
Custom Volume Size operations
To overwrite control blocks in volumes in an external LU group:
1.
On the upper right of the XP Remote Web Console main pane, select a CU group from the drop-down list.
2.
From the Customized Volume pane, right-click the LDEV folder at the top of the tree, and select
Write to Control Blocks.
3.
In the Write to Control Blocks pane, select the desired external LU group from the Candidate ExG list, and click Add. The selected external LU group moves to the Target ExG list.
NOTE:
• You can select one or more external LU groups.
• To remove external LU groups from the Target ExG list, select the external LU groups from the list, and click Delete. The external LU groups move to the Candidate ExG list.
4.
Click OK.
5.
Click Apply. A confirmation message appears.
CAUTION:
Cancel the operation if the external LU group includes volumes that are not zero-formatted.
If you continue the operation, hosts cannot access the volumes.
6.
Click OK. Volume Manager starts overwriting the control blocks.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
211
212
Custom Volume Size operations
11 Troubleshooting Volume
Manager and Custom Volume Size
• For troubleshooting information about an array, see the array’s documentation.
• For troubleshooting information about Command View XP or XP Remote Web Console, see the
HP StorageWorks Command View XP user guide for XP Disk Arrays or the HP StorageWorks XP
Remote Web Console user guide for XP12000/XP10000/SVS200.
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
213
214
Troubleshooting Volume Manager and Custom Volume Size
Index
Symbols
16-port channel adapters, serial numbers and names
4-port channel adapters, serial numbers and names
8-port channel adapters, serial numbers and names
A
Add iSCSI name button
Add LU Path button
Add WWN button
addresses, Fibre Channel ports
AIX environments server host modes
WWNs, findings
AL-PA addresses
alternate paths defining
limitations
viewing
arbitrated loop physical address (AL-PA)
audience
authentication
Port Information list
switches, Fibre Channel environments
Target list
Authentication pane
authentication, host
Fibre Channel environments
iSCSI environments
list
authentication, mutual
Fibre Channel environments
iSCSI environments
authentication, user
Fibre Channel environments
iSCSI environments
B block volumes, formatting
Blockade function
boundary values for RAID levels
C
Capacity Unit list
Change Port Mode box
channel adapters (CHAs) package status icons ,
CHN list
command devices
Command View XP PC
concatenated parity groups
Concatenation List pane
control blocks
conventions document
copying paths
Customized Volume pane
CVS operations capacities
concatenated parity groups, viewing
configuration information, viewing
Customized Volume pane
deleting volumes
emulation types
functions
Install Custom Volume function
Install CV function
Install CV pane (1)
Install CV pane (2)
Install CV pane (3)
Install CV pane (4)
installing software
Make Volume function
Make Volume pane (1)
Make Volume pane (2)
Make Volume pane (3)
Make Volume pane (4)
management area capacities
Modify mode
permissions
samples
slot capacities
SSID requirements
starting software
system requirements
troubleshooting
Volume Initialize function
Volume Initialize pane (1)
Volume Initialize pane (2)
Volume Initialize pane (3)
Volume to Space Confirmation pane
Volume to Space function
D data transfer speed, Fibre Channel ports
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
215
deleting
CVS volumes
host bus adapters
host groups
iSCSI names
iSCSI targets
LU paths
WWNs
disabling LUN security
document conventions
prerequisites
related documentation
documentation
HP website
providing feedback
DYNIX host modes
E emulation types
CV capacities
CVS specifications
groups
management area capacities
slot capacities
SSID requirements
enabling
LUN Manager
LUN security
expanded LDEVs
external LU groups
external mainframe volumes making usable
writing to control blocks
F fabric topology
FC Switch Information list
FC-AL topology
Fibre Channel environments
Change Port Mode box
changing WWN names
copying paths
creating host groups
data transfer speed
defined
finding WWNs
host authentication
host information
host settings and connection results
LU paths
LUN Path tree
mutual authentication
Package tree
port addresses
Port Information list
port information, specifying
Port pane
port status
Port table
registering hosts in host groups
registering port user information
switch authentication
topology
user authentication
Format All pane
formatting LDEVs
free LDEVs
H help obtaining
high-speed mode
16-port channel adapter serial numbers
4-port channel adapter serial numbers
8-port channel adapter serial numbers
applying
Change Port Mode box
XP10000/SVS200 serial numbers
host authentication
Fibre Channel environments
iSCSI environments
Target list
host bus adapters deleting
names, changing
216
host groups associating to logical volumes
authentication, enabling and disabling
clearing user information
configuring
creating
deleting
deleting host bus adapters
initializing group 0
mode, changing
name, changing
registering hosts in
registering user information
Host list
host user information, Fibre Channel environments changing
deleting
specifying
host user information, iSCSI environments changing
clearing
deleting
registering on a target
specifying
hosts finding WWNs
modes
registering in host groups
registering user information
HP settings and connection results
technical support
HP-UX environments, finding WWNs
I
Initiator/External MIX modes
16-port channel adapter serial numbers
4-port channel adapter serial numbers
8-port channel adapter serial numbers
applying
XP10000/SVS200 serial numbers
Install CV function
Install CV pane
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
installing Volume Manager and CVS
iSCSI environments
Add button
Change Port Mode box
channel adapter packages
configuring
connection results
copying paths
host authentication
host groups, registering hosts in
LU paths
mutual authentication
names, changing
Package tree
Port pane
port status
Port table
settings
status, connection
user authentication
iSCSI folder
iSCSI Function box
iSCSI name table
iSCSI names, deleting
iSCSI targets associating to logical volumes
creating
deleting
host authentication, enabling and disabling ,
host bus adapters, deleting
host mode, changing
initializing
mutual authentication
registering host user information
settings and connection results
iSNS server settings
L
LDEV Information table
LDEV table
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
217
LDEVs associating host groups to logical volumes ,
command devices
Concatenation List pane
expanded
formatting
free
Information table
Information tree
LUN Path table
LUSE volume capacity, changing
LUSE volumes, creating with
LDEV Information table
Select an LDEV list
Volume Count list
parity group tree
path-defined
releasing a LUSE volume
resetting an unregistered volume
restrictions
Set LUSE Confirmation pane
status icons
status table
Volume to Space function
limitations
LUN Manager
Volume Manager
Linux host modes
logging in to LUN Manager
logical volumes, associating host groups
loop IDs
LU Path table
LU Path tree
LU paths
Add button
associating host groups to logical volumes ,
copying
defining
deleting
Fibre Channel environment
iSCSI environment
limitations
NAS environment
LU paths, alternate defining
viewing
LUN Manager pane
LUN Manager, starting
LUN security disabling
enabling
LUN status icons
LUSE volumes capacities, changing
concatenated parity groups
creating with
LDEV Information table
Select an LDEV list
Volume Count list
guidelines
releasing
reset confirmation pane
resetting unregistered
setting
viewing configuration information
M
Make Volume function
Make Volume pane
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
management area capacity
Modify mode
mutual authentication
Fibre Channel environments
iSCSI environments
N
NAS environments channel adapter status
channel adapters
CHN list
configuring
copying paths
host groups, registering hosts in
LU paths
Package tree
Port pane
port status
NAS folder
NetWare host modes
nicknames, changing
Novell NetWare host modes
O
OPEN volumes, LUSE guidelines
open-system hosts
OPEN-V
CV capacity
Install Custom Volume function
Install CV pane (1)
Make Volume function
Make Volume operation
Make Volume pane (1)
management area capacity
parity group configuration
OpenVMS host modes
218
overwriting control blocks
P
Package tree
parity groups concatenated
Concatenation List pane
configuration
Format All pane
status icons
pinging iSCSI hosts
point-to-point topology
Port Information list
Port pane
port serial numbers
16-port channel adapters
4-port channel adapters
8-port channel adapters
XP10000/SVS200
port statuses
Fibre Channel
iSCSI
NAS
Port table
ports alternate paths, defining
Change Port Mode box
channel adapter packages
copying paths
Fibre Channel switch authentication
Fibre Channel, specifying information
iSCSI settings
iSCSI targets, creating
LU paths
LUN security
mutual authentication
security
speed modes
WWN name table
prerequisites
R
RAID levels, boundary values
RAID Manager XP command devices
RAID parity group status
RAID volumes status table
related documentation
Release LUSE Confirmation pane
releasing a LUSE volume
remote command devices
Reset LUSE Confirmation pane
resetting unregistered LUSE volumes
restrictions
LUN Manager
Volume Manager
S security disabling
enabling
ports
RAID Manager XP
Select an LDEV list
Sequent environments finding WWNs
host modes
serial numbers, ports
16-port channel adapters
4-port channel adapters
8-port channel adapters
XP10000/SVS200
Set LUSE Confirmation pane
Set SSID
Install CV
Make Volume
Volume Initialize
settings connection results
iSCSI ports
iSCSI targets and connection results
limitations
SGI IRIX, finding WWNs
slot capacity
software, enabling
Solaris host modes
speed
16-port channel adapter serial numbers
4-port channel adapter serial numbers
8-port channel adapter serial numbers
Change Port Mode box
Fibre Channel ports data transfer
modes
XP10000/SVS200 channel adapter serial numbers
SSID
Install CV
Make Volume
requirements
Volume Initialize
standard speed mode
16-port channel adapter serial numbers
4-port channel adapter serial numbers
8-port channel adapter serial numbers
applying
Change Port Mode box
XP10000/SVS200 serial numbers
starting
CVS
LUN Manager
Volume Manager
LUN Configuration and Security Manager XP user guide
219
status channel adapter packages
Fibre Channel ports
iSCSI connection
iSCSI ports
LDEVs
LUN icons
NAS channel adapters
NAS ports
parity groups
VDEV
volume
Subscriber's Choice, HP
Sun Solaris, finding WWNs
switch authentication, Fibre Channel environments
system requirements
CVS and Volume Manager
LUN Manager
T
Target list, authentication
targets, creating iSCSI
technical support
HP
service locator website
troubleshooting
CVS
LUN Manager
Volume Manager
Tru64 host modes
U unregistered LUSE volumes, resetting
user authentication
Authentication pane
Fibre Channel environments
iSCSI environments
V
VDEVs parity group tree
recreating CVs
status
Volume Count list
Volume Initialize function
Volume Initialize pane
(1)
(2)
(3)
Volume Manager concatenated parity groups, viewing
Concatenation List pane
creating LUSE volumes with
LDEV Information table
Select an LDEV list
Volume Count list
function
installing
LUSE capacities, changing
Modify mode
path-defined LDEVs
permissions
Release LUSE Confirmation pane
releasing LUSE volumes
Reset LUSE Confirmation pane
resetting unregister LUSE volumes
restrictions
Set LUSE Confirmation pane
shortcut menu
starting
system requirements
troubleshooting
viewing LUSE configuration
Volume Manager pane
volume status
Volume to Space Confirmation pane
Volume to Space function
W websites
HP
HP Subscriber's Choice for Business
product manuals
Windows server host modes
WWNs, finding
writing to control blocks
WWNs
Add button
deleting
finding
name table
names, changing
WWW client computers
X
XP10000/SVS200, serial numbers and names ,
220
Advertisement
Key Features
- LUN path configuration
- LUN security
- Fibre Channel and iSCSI port configuration
- User authentication
- RAID Manager XP integration